2G Huawei NSN Parameter Mapping PDF

Parameters Table Recommended value
Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900&DCS1800
MCC Cell_Common 470
MNC Cell_Common 02
NCC Cell_Common 0~7
BCC Cell_Common 0~7
GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS
EDGE Support Cell_Common No
Cellband Cell_Common 0
RAC Cell_Common As per plan
FH MODE Cell_Common As per frequency plan
MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Cell_Common 63
Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell
Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None
UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden Cell_Common Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1
Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Cell_Common Yes
DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes
TRX Index TRx Depend on invidual site
TRX No. TRx Depend on invidual site
Cell Index TRx Depend on invidual site
Site Index TRx Depend on invidual site
Active State TRx Activated
Depends on BTS/site
Receive Mode TRx
configuration
MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Basic_Parameter 63

No (tunable based on
DL DTX Basic_Parameter
performance)
Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1
Call Reestablishment Forbidden Basic_Parameter Yes
UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use
Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close

Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close
Allocation TRX Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24
MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4
N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23
AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24
AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75

T3105(10ms) HO 7
Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. HO 30
ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60
DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60
ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60
DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60
UL Qual. Threshold HO 50
DL Qual. Threshold HO 50
MS Power Prediction after HO HO No

Inter-System Handover Enable HO No
PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No
Load HO Allowed HO Yes
SDCCH HO Allowed HO No
PT(s) Idle_Mode 0
TO Idle_Mode 0
Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode 0
PI Idle_Mode Yes
CRH Idle_Mode 6dB
Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60(should same for same LAC)
BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period
BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 1
NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 255
Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode 0
ATT Idle_Mode Yes
T3122(s) Other_Properties 10
T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Other_Properties 85


Filter Length for DL Qual. Power_Control 5
Filter Length for UL Qual. Power_Control 4
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5
Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4
DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4
DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30
UL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4
UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0
UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35
PC Interval Power_Control 3
Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15

PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1
PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1
GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec
GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB
T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms
T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms

Default Description
This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is
None
460.
None This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).
This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator.
0 The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide.
The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).
This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the
0
same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell.
not support GPRS The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be
configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus
This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM,
No EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution
(EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv
This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated
frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be
0 changed.
GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.
DCS1800: The cell
This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state
performs location management based on the routing area.
As per plan
Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.
For example, value 0 indic
This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used.
As per frequency plan If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where
the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen
This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell.

After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS
62
determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by
comparing the TA and the value
This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement
the extended cell.
Normal Cell
A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay.
Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120
This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function.
None In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission
Shall Use
(DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall
Yes buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this
case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details.
1 see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover
procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell.
Yes
Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless
network. It is n
This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed.

Yes When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to
access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi
Yes This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..
65535 This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC.
This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS.
The following two points should be paid attention to:
1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the
255 TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers
may be discontinuous.
2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them
is not mandatory.
Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.
None Internal 2G cells: 0-2047
External 2G cells: 2048-5047
65535 This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.
Activated This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.
This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU.

The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four
Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity.
None
The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main
Diversity.
The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity.

62
comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.
Yes This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.
Yes
network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is
preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS
and the network layout.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details.
8 see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall
buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this
case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of
Yes
call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber
hooks on.
Shall Use
This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used.

When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this
parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be
Close
reduced.
Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.
This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO.
In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference
among channels occur.
Close
When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the
inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially.
In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.
This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to
Yes NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective.
Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority
preferentially.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the
current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment
threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of
15 the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since
there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an
adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
As per plan the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since
As per frequency plan the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since
This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the
SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08.
Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value
is set to this parameter value.
52 Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an
SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is
equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data
quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power
control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be
sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure.
After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages
4 Times on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the
MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate
Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified
interval.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS.
If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter
23 indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200
SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For
52
details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details,
64
see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry.
85 When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than
or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.
This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and
04.08.
When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the
7
timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical
information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical
information is Ny1.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions.

Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1
before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a
connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving
the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer
T3105.
During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS.
30
Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a
Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the
MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts.
The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees
correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from
the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An

60 emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
greater than the value of this parameter.
60 emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is
65 emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
65 emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is
This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An

emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater
than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold.
60
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially
selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if
intra-cell handovers are allowed.
This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover.
An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or
equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.
60
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially
selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if
intra-cell handovers are allowed.
This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the
No maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to
minimize system interference and improve signal quality.
This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed
The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and
No
from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm.
Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell
in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less
Yes
path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover
can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT
handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.
This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to
a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be
No handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that
this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The
fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.
This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled.

The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel
assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network
performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in
No
the cells of the same layer.
The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust
abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the
cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.
No This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.
The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell
reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08
0
and 04.08.
This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before
0 the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408.
This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell
reselection.
1: barred
0: allowed
Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec.
No 04.08.
Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority
0 0 Normal Normal
0 1 Barred Barred
1 0 Low Normal
1 1 Low Normal
Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates
whether CRO, TO, and PT are used.
Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see
GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell
Yes
reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.
When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system
information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2
equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.
This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different
6dB LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of
losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.
This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.
In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period
decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network
increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period
20 decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly
shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of
the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR.
Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller
value in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.
This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is,
the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel.
In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see
GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08.
If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell
increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and
prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For details about the calculation of the
paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the
2 Multiframe Period
system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases.
This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In
addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging
channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this
parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load.
A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity
of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be
the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC.
This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is
2 configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH.
This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.
This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an
information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages.
If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding
11111111
measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit
maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS
does not measure the cell level of NCC N.
This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA).

Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed.
Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed.
Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details,
see GSM Rec. 04.08.
No
0 0 Normal Normal
0 1 Barred Barred
1 0 Low Normal
1 1 Low Normal
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For
different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.
Yes
If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off,
thus saving the network processing time and network resources.
This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the
BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS.
10
After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another
attempt to access the network after the timer expires.
This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel
deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a
1000 period of time for repeated link disconnections.
The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF
CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.
The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives
27000 the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the
channel, if the timer T3109 expires.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover
10000 command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC
handover fails.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover
10000 request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC
handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.
After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer
10000 T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After
the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.
In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7
is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover
10000
acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC
handover failure message.
This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure.
The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC
3000
receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before
the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.

The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and
reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign
channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into
six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS
determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio
85 resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to
determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result
provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too
obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference
is not reflected.

channels.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.
channels.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.

channels.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.

channels.
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.

channels.
determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio
08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the
5
average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
5
average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
5
average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
5
average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold
and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the
upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter
specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
3 Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper
threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between
25 the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal
level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control.
specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control
3
commands.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a
15
candidate cell for handover.
This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges
from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PRACH.
1
Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.
...
Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.
This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges
from 1 to 4.
Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.
1
Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.
Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.
Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent
10sec
through the system message broadcast in each cell.
When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative
offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires.
This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS.
10dB
Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is
shorter than the penalty time.
Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving
the last data block.
When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and
confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet
Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts
T3192 at the same time.
500ms
If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. During
the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink
Assignment message, the MS responds immediately.
If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release
process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, it enters the
dedicated mode.
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment
message.
This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink
Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink
Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the
500ms
Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network.
If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is
reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. If the Packet
Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF
establishment has failed.
Configuration Policy NSN PARAMETER
Name
BAND
None
MCC
None MNC
This parameter should be set as required.
NCC
1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the

receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the
other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the
received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon
BCC
None
GENA
None
EGENA
None
BAND
None
RAC
None
HOP
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate
may be affected.
DMAX
None
DMAX
None
AHOP
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission

in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following
benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS
and reducing system interference
2. On the downlink
DTX
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is
allowed.
If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate
decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor
coverage, this parameter should be set to No.
Call reestablishment
RE
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of

received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on
the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call
drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based
RXP
None
DR
None
DYNAMIC_SDCCH
None
PENA
None TRX_ID
None
TRX_NUM
None
CI
None
BTS_ID
If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards
in this BTS will be activated.
Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs,
and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.
When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to
Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to
Not Activated.
STATE
None
RDIV
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate
may be affected.
DMAX
The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a
transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice
transfer. This function has the following benefits:
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS,
reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation
inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference
is reduced and the network quality is improved.
The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this
function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side.
If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX cannot
be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this
parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell.
DOWNLINK DTX
None
DR
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of

received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on
the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call
drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the
balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels.
RXP
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is

allowed.
Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and therefore the
subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended that this
parameter be set to Yes.
RE
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission

in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following
benefits:
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS,
reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation
inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference
is reduced and the network quality is improved.
DTX
None
HSN1
None
FLEXIBLE MAIO
MANAGEMENT
None
TRP
None
HRH3
None
HRH2
None
HRH1
None
HRTD3
None
HRTD2
None
HRTD1
None
HRH3
None
HRH2
None
HRH1
None
HRTU3
None
HRTU2
None
HRTU1
None
FRH3
None
FRH2
None
FRH1
None
FRTD3
None
FRTD2
None
FRTD1
None
FRH3
None
FRH2
None
FRH1
None
FRTU3
None
FRTU2
None
FRTU1
If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be

faulty and therefore call drops occur.
If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before
an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low.
This parameter takes effect on the downlink.
RLT
This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the

traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to
improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where
congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is
high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1.
RET
None
T200S
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under

the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a
low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function
is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode
can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.
AHRLT
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under

the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a
low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function
is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode
can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.
ARLT
If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with heavy
loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover
does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is
difficult to select candidate target cells.
DRT
The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA
frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of
T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to
retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer
T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of the physical
information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is
invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH
period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable
minimum value for this parameter. At present, the default value
of this parameter is 70 ms.
T3105
The value of this parameter can be increased when handover

becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of
clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over
only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link
Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO
DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.
NY1
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ
handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the
uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. QURH
handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the
downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. QDRH
handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the
uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. QURF
downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. QDRF

handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink
BQ handover is easily triggered.
QUR

handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the
downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.
QDR
If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum
transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased,
but the network interference is reduced.
POPT
None
ISHO
Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be

enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross
coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent
channel interference.
EPB
It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special

areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving
micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special
conditions.
FMT
If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be

introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.
TRHO
When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled

on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.
ESD
None
PET
None
TEO
The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system.
QUA
The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum
interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2
value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly
checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to
following conditions:
Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below
0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large.
C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving
cell in 5s and the following conditions are met:
The C2 of a new cell in another LAC minus CRH (broadcast in
the system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of
the serving cell in 5s.
A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the
new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell
in 5s.
A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a better cell
exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does not go to the previous cell
within 5s.
PI
An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus,

the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location
updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that the MS
camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA
changes.
HYS
It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20,

or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2
or 3, in the area with light traffic.
To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to

perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities
involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as
the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the
A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR.
The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that
in the BSC.
In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is
identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update
request within a long period.
When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is
restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell
differs from that of the original cell.
When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is
possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS
sends no location update request for a long period. In this case,
system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though
the called MS is on.
In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all
cells.
PER
The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging
sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each
paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the
average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of
paging messages and reduce the system performance.
MFR
None
AG
The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the
NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call
drops.
PLMN
The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is

set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are
allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This
condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common
cell, this parameter should be set to 0.
The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS.
BAR
None
ATT
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel
load and influence the access success rate.
T3122
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel
resources and cause the congestion.
T3111
T3109
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
handover success rate. T8
assignment success rate. T3107
immediate assignment success rate.
T3101
None
BO5
None
BO4
None
BO3
None
BO2
None
BO1
None
BO0
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the downlink signal
quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the
MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the
delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of
measurement reports.
QDS

network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality.
This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS.
When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay
and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of
QUS

levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the
BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the
delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of
LDS

network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels.
This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS.
When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay
and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of
LUS
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor

without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good
without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
LDR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor

without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded.
without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
UDR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is
reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes
low, and call drop may easily occur.
LDR

parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes
UDR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of

the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation
quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery
life is reduced.
LUR

without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the
network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too
great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the
conversation quality is degraded.
UUR

parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes
LUR

parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes
The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level
at HO Access.
UUR
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control
may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the
resources. INT
None
SL
None
PRB
None
PBB
If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this
parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area
of the micro cell is large. GPET
None
GTEO
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources

(including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If no
downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not used but
occupied for a long time.
If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the TBF
resources within a shorter period. However, if the network sends
new downlink PDU data packets, the network must initiate a
paging or immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the
downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period.
If the download data packets from the network are not received
and T3192 does not expire, the network directly sends a Packet
Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF,
thus shortening the TBF establishment time.
On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends on the
average transmission interval between two successive downlink
data.
On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze the
traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into
consideration. When network resources are sufficient, that is the
GPRS congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a large
value, shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving
data transmission rate.
T3192
If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the TBF
establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF
establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is short,
but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio
environment decreases. In addition, the small timer value
increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet
access request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment
by the PCU and wasting system resources.
If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a longer period
to detect the TBF establishment failure. If the TBF establishment
fails, the average delay of packet access is long, but the success
rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases.
T3168
Parameter Name Unit Step Size Default Value
frequency band in use GSM 900 (0)
mobile country code

mobile network code
BSIC NCC 1
Obligatory in creation when

LCSE not connected to any
segment, otherwise read from
bsIdentityCode RNW db.
GPRSenabled N
egprsEnabled N
frequency band in use GSM 900 (0)
routing area code 255
HoppingMode No
msMaxDistanceInCallSetup TA 255
dtxMode 2
callReestablishmentAllowed N
rxLevAccessMin dBm -105
drInUse N
powerCtrlEnabled Y
TRX ID 1
CellId -
BTS ID
Administrative State Locked (3)
diversityUsed N
drInUse N
rxLevAccessMin dBm -105
callReestablishmentAllowed N
dtxMode 2
hoppingSequenceNumber1 0
trxPriorityInTCHAlloc 0
amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3 0.5dB 0

radioLinkTimeout SACCH 4 20
maxNumberRetransmission 4
SDCCH LAPDm T200
AMR HR Radio Link Timeout
AMR Radio Link Timeout
drThreshold dBm -100

maxNumberOfRepetitions 5
amrHoHrThrUlRxQual
amrHoHrThrDlRxQual
amrHoFrThrUlRxQual
amrHoFrThrDlRxQual
hoThresholdsQualUL 4
hoThresholdsQualDL 4
msPwrOptLev dBm N
enablePwrBudgetHandover Yes
fastMovingThreshold SACCH 0
trhoTargetLevel dBm N
enableSDCCHHandover N
penaltyTime sec 20 20
temporaryOffset dB 10 0
cellBarQualify N
cellReselectParamInd N
cellReselectHysteresis dB 4
timerPeriodicUpdateMS hours 0.5

noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging 4
noOfBlocksForAccessGrant 1
plmnPermitted NCC
cellBarred N
allowIMSIAttachDetach Y
interferenceAveragingProcess dBm -47


pcAveragingQualDL / windows size SACCH 1
pcAveragingQualUL / windows size SACCH 1
pcAveragingLevDL / windows size SACCH 4
pcAveragingLevUL / windows size SACCH 4
PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx

Qual
PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx

Qual
PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx
Level
PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx

Level
PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx

Qual
PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx

Qual
PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx

Level
PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx

Level
powerControlInterval sec 2
rxLevMinCell dBm -100

bsPRACHBlocks 6
bsPBCCHBlocks 3
gprsPenaltyTime sec 10s 10
gprsTemporaryOffset dB 0
Range
GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1),

GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)
3 characters
2...3 characters
0...7
0…7
NoYes
Y/N
GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1),

GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)
0…255
No/BB/RF
0...255
0...2
Yes/No
-110...-47
Yes/No
Yes/No
1...16
1…65535
1...10 characters
Y/N
0...255
Yes/No
-110...-47
Yes/No
0...2
0...63/N
0...2
0…15
0…15
0…15
4...64
1, 2, 4 or 7
-110…-47
5...35
0...7
0...7
-110... -47/ N
Yes/No
0...255
-109... -47/ N
Yes/No
20...640
0...70
Y/N
Y/N
0...14
0 / 0.1...25.5
2...9
0...7
0…7
Yes/No
Yes/No
-47…FIXED
-110...-47
-110...-47
-110...-47
-110...-47
-110…FIXED
1...32
1...32
1...32
1...32
0...31
-110...-47
0…12
1…4
10…320
0…70
Proposed
Parameter Name Old Value Remarks Unit
Value
UL DTX Shall Use Shall Use
Call Reestablishment Forbidden NA Yes None
Not matched
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 0 1 with other
vendor
TCH Immediate Assignment No No

Direct Retry Yes Yes
UL PC Allowed No Yes None
DL PC Allowed No Yes None
Encryption Algorithm NA <10000000> None
Tunable
DL DTX NA No based on None
performance
MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) 63 Bit Period

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier NA NO
Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment NA NO
ATT Yes Yes
20 (32
Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA
NA Satelite
frame,4.615ms))
Cells)
Cell_Bar_Access NA 0
NCC Permitted NA 255
BS_AG_BLKS_RES NA 1
4 Multiframe 4 Multiframe
BS-PA-MFRAMS
Period Period
Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) NA 40 Ericsson 60

CRH 6dB 6dB
PI Yes Yes
Cell_Bar_Qualify 0 0
CRO(2dB) 0 0
ACS No No
TO 0 0
PT(s) NA 0
Need to
SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) 24 24
standerdize
To identify
MS request
RACH Busy Threshold 5 16 at -94 dBm
or worst
coverage
Tunable
Paging Times 1 1 based on
performance
Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable NA Disable
Need to
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold NA discuss with
Huawei
Speech Version NA 47
Allowed &
Recover
TRX Aiding Function Control NA None
When Check
Res.
Random Access Error Threshold NA 200

RACH Min.Access Level 0 1
T200 SDCCH(5ms) 60 60
T200 FACCH/F(5ms) 50 50
T200 FACCH/H(5ms) 50 50
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) 150 150
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) 200 200
T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) 60 60
T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) 60 60
Use LAPDm N200 No No
N200 of Establish 5 5
N200 of Release 5 5
N200 of SACCH 5 5
N200 of SDCCH 23 23
N200 of FACCH/Half rate 29 29
N200 of FACCH/Full rate 34 34
Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter No No
Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) NA 4
If use
Imm_Ass
Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass NA 2
Retrans,
Default
4 (7 for 4 (7 for
MS MAX Retrans
Satelite Site) Satelite Site)
Common Access Control Class Not selected Not selected
Special Access Control Class Not selected Not selected

Emergent Call Disable NA No
All vendor
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) 20 24 same
platform
ECSC Yes Yes

0(for normal 0(for normal
cell); 2(near cell); 2(near
MBR
to Dualband to Dualband
cell) cell)
Power Deviation Indication Yes Yes

Power Deviation(2dB) 1 1
3G
Serving Band Reporting NA NA
Parameter
3G
Qsearch I NA NA
Parameter
3G
Qsearch C Initial NA NA
Parameter
3G
FDD Q Offset NA NA
Parameter
3G
FDD REP QUANT NA NA
Parameter
3G
FDD MULTIRAT Reporting NA NA
Parameter
3G
FDD Qmin NA NA
Parameter
3G
Qsearch P NA NA
Parameter
3G
3G Search PRIO NA NA
Parameter
3G
Invalid BSIC Reporting NA NA
Parameter
3G
Scale Order NA NA
Parameter
3G
Qsearch C NA NA
Parameter
3G
900 Reporting Offset NA NA
Parameter
3G
900 Reporting Threshold NA NA
Parameter
3G
1800 Reporting Offset NA NA
Parameter
3G
1800 Reporting Threshold NA NA
Parameter
3G
FDD Reporting Offset NA NA
Parameter
3G
FDD Reporting Threshold NA NA
Parameter
Tunable
Allow Reassign No No based on
performance
Allow EMLPP No No
Immediate Assignment Opt. NA NO
Short Message Uplink Disabled No No
Short Message Downlink Disabled No No
Tunable
Frequency Band of Reassign No Same Band based on
performance
Max Assignment Retry Times NA 2

AMR ACS(F) NA 165
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) NA 12
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) NA 2
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) NA 12
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) NA 2
AMR Starting Mode(F) NA 1
AMR ACS(H) NA 15
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) NA 12
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) NA 2
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) NA 12
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) NA 2
AMR Starting Mode(H) NA 0
Co-BSC/MSC Adj No No
SDCCH HO Allowed No No
Intracell HO Allowed Yes Yes None
Tunable
Load HO Allowed No Yes based on None
performance
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed No No None

Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed No No None
PBGT HO Allowed Yes Yes
Level HO Allowed NA NO
Fringe HO Allowed NA Yes
BQ HO Allowed NA Yes
TA HO Allowed NA Yes
Yes (for MB
Concentric Circles HO Allowed NA cell), No for
othres
Interference HO Allowed NA Yes

Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold 5 15 Grade
Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold 10 20 Grade
Edge HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second
Edge HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second
Layer HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second
Layer HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second
PBGT Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second
PBGT Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second
Inter-layer HO Threshold NA 25
Tunable
Inter-layer HO Hysteresis 3 3 based on dB
performance
Tunable
Min DL Level on Candidate Cell 15 10 based on Grade
performance
Intracell F-H HO Allowed NA Yes

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) NA 5 Second
Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) NA 4 Second
F2H HO th NA 30
H2F HO th NA 10
Min Interval for TCH HOs NA 4
Min Interval for SDCCH HOs NA 2
Min Interval for Consecutive HOs 6 6 Second
Min Interval for Emerg.HOs NA 2
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed NA NO
Penalty Allowed Yes Yes None
MS Power Prediction after HO No No
MR.Preprocessing NA Yes
Transfer Original MR NA NO
Transfer BS/MS Power Class Yes Yes None
Once Every
Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR NA
Second
Number of
Allowed M.R Number Lost NA 4
MR
Number of
Filter Length for TCH Level 6 6
MR
Filter Length for TCH Qual NA 6
Filter Length for SDCCH Level 2 2 None
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual NA 3
Number of
Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV 6 6
MR
Number of
Filter Length for TA 6 6
MR
Penalty Level after HO Fail NA 30
Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) NA 10
Penalty Level after BQ HO NA 30 dB
Penalty Time after BQ HO(s) NA 10
Penalty Level after TA HO NA 63 dB
Penalty Time after TA HO(s) NA 10
Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) NA 30
TA Threshold NA 255
DL Qual. Threshold NA 50
UL Qual. Threshold NA 50
UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO NA 40
DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO NA 40
UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO NA 30
DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO NA 35
Filter Parameter A1 10 10 None
Filter Parameter B 0 0 None
No Dl Mr.HO Allowed NA Yes
No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit NA 60
Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit NA 8
System Flux Threshold for Load HO NA 10
Load HO Threshold NA 5
Load Req.on Candidate Cell NA 2
Load HO Bandwidth NA 25 dB
Load HO Step Period 5 10 Second
Load HO Step Level 5 5 dB
MS Fast-moving Watch Cells NA NA None
MS Fast-moving Valid Cells NA NA None
MS Fast-moving Time Threshold NA 15
MAX Consecutive HO Times NA 3 Times
Forbidden time after MAX Times 20 20 Second
Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. 6 6 Second
Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO NA 30 dB
Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) NA 40
UL Expected Level at HO Access 35 35 Grade
Need to
K Bias NA 0 discuss with
Huawei
UL to OL HO Allowed Yes Yes None

OL to UL HO Allowed Yes Yes None
RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed NA Yes None
RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed NA Yes None
TA for UO HO Allowed NA No None
UO Signal Intensity Difference NA 0 None
RX_LEV Threshold NA 40 None
RX_LEV Hysteresis NA NA dB
RX_QUAL Threshold NA 50 None
TA Threshold NA 63 Bit Period
TA Hysteresis 0 0 Bit Period
UO HO Watch Time(s) NA 5 Second
UO HO Valid Time(s) NA 4 Second
System System
Assign Optimum Layer None
optimization optimization
Assign-optimum-level Threshold NA 35 dBm
TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. NA 63 Bit Period
TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed NA No None
TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. NA 0 Bit Period
System System
Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC None
optimization optimization
Underlaid Underlaid
Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer None
subcell subcell
OtoU HO Received Level Threshold NA 20 Grade
UtoO HO Received Level Threshold NA 35 Grade
UtoO Traffic HO Allowed NA Yes None
Need to
Traffic Threshold of Underlay NA discuss with
Huawei
Underlay HO Step Period(s) NA 5 Second

Underlay HO Step Level NA 5 None
Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) NA 5 Second
Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) NA 30 Second
Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) NA 5 Second
MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail NA 3 None
3G
Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed NA NA
Parameter
3G
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed NA NA
Parameter
3G
Inter-RAT HO Preference NA NA
Parameter
3G
HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell NA NA
Parameter
3G
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA
Parameter
3G
Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA
Parameter
3G
3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) NA NA
Parameter
3G
3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) NA NA
Parameter
3G
Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP NA NA
Parameter
3G
Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP NA NA
Parameter
3G
Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP NA NA
Parameter
3G
Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP NA NA
Parameter
3G
Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT NA NA
Parameter
3G
Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT NA NA
Parameter
Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. NA 30 None
T3105(10ms) NA 7 10 ms
PC Interval NA NA
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 35 Grade
UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 25 Grade
UL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade
UL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 30 Grade
DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 20 Grade
DL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade
DL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade
SACCH
Filter Length for UL RX_LEV NA 4
Period
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV NA NA
SACCH
Filter Length for UL Qual. NA 4
Period
Filter Length for DL Qual. NA NA
MR. Compensation Allowed NA Yes None
Number of
UL MR. Number Predicted NA 1
MR
Number of
DL MR. Number Predicted NA 1
MR
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0 NA 6 dB
MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 6 dB
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV NA 16 dB
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 8 dB
UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 None
UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 dB
DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 None
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 dB
BTS PC Class NA 16 Grade
AMR PC Interval NA 3 None
SACCH
AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV NA 4
Period
SACCH
AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV NA 4
Period
SACCH
AMR Filter Length for UL Qual NA 4
Period
SACCH
AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. NA 4
Period
AMR MR. Compensation Allowed NA Yes None
AMR UL MR. Number Predicted NA 1 MR Number
AMR DL MR. Number Predicted NA 1 MR Number

AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 35 Grade
AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 25 Grade
AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade
AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade
AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 30 Grade
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 20 Grade
AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade
AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0 NA 6 dB
AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 6 dB
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV NA 16 dB
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 8 Grade

AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 dB
AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 None
AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 dB
AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 None
AMR BTS PC Class NA 16 dB
Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 NA 2 None
Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum 80 80 None
TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) 60 60 Second
Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed NA Yes None
Need to
Idle TCH Threshold N1 NA discuss with
Huawei
Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) NA 1 Minute

TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) NA 50 Percentage
Interf. Priority Allowed Yes Yes None
Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed Yes Yes None
Allocation TRX Priority Allowed Yes Yes None
History Record Priority Allowed Yes Yes None
Balance Traffic Allowed Yes Yes None
Interf.of UL Level Threshold NA 30 Grade
Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold NA 50 Grade
Interf.of DL Level Threshold NA 25 Grade
Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold NA 50 Grade
Number of
Filter Length for TCH Level 6 6
MR
Number of
Filter Length for TCH Qual. 6 6
MR
Filter Length for SDCCH Level 2 2 None
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. 2 2 None
Updata Period of CH Record(min) NA 30 Minute
Updata Freq.of CH Record NA 2 None
AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed NA Yes
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold NA 2
TCH req suspend interval(s) NA 60 Second
Allow Rate Selection Based on
NA Yes
Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load
Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid
NA 30
Subcell
Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid
NA 30
Subcell
Need to
Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted NA discuss with
Huawei
<011011100
Data service Allowed NA None
0>
SMCBC DRX NA Yes None
Cell Load0 Threshold NA 20
Cell Load Change Delay NA 3
Need to
Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold NA discuss with
Huawei
Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) NA 110

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) NA 20
Need to
Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) NA discuss with
Huawei
Frame Start Time NA 65535

DC Bias Voltage Threshold NA 3
Power Output Error Threshold NA 2
Power Output Reduction Threshold NA 2
VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold NA 2
VSWR TRX Error Threshold NA 2
Radio Resource Report Period(s) NA 10 Second
CCCH Load Indication Period(s) NA 15
CCCH Load Threshold NA 80
Overload Indication Period 15 15
Average RACH Load Timeslot Number NA 5000
Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) NA 360
Included Angle(Degree) NA 360
Discard
BCCH TS
Power while
PWRC Not selected Yes calculating
Power
Control in
BBHopping
5 (900), 0 5 (900), 0
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
(1800) (1800)
Support Half Rate NA Yes
Abis Flow Control Permitted Yes Yes
Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) NA 15 Second
Directly Magnifier Site Flag NA No None
Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM
NA 1 None
response)
Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access
NA 1 None
fail)
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM
NA 1 None
intervention)
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio
NA 1 None
resource not available)
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Release Indication NA 1 None
Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Equipment Failure NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure NA 1 None
Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Resource Check NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover
NA 1 None
Timeout
Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout NA 1 None
Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch NA Yes None
T3101(ms) NA 3000 ms
ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) NA 5000 ms
T3103A(ms) NA 10000 ms
T3103C(ms) NA 10000 ms
T7(ms) NA 10000 ms
T3107(ms) NA 10000 ms
T3121(ms) NA 10000 ms
T8(ms) NA 10000 ms
T3109(ms) NA 27000 ms
T3111(ms) NA 1000 ms
TREESTABLISH(ms) NA 15000 ms
T3122(s) NA 10 ms
Parameters Table Recommended Value Default
Single band
Multiband
900MHz
Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900 GSM900&DCS1800
Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked Unlocked
Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3 3
MCC Cell_Common 470 470 None
MNC Cell_Common 02 02 None
NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0
BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0
Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1 Prior-1
Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated Activated
PCU Cell_Common 255 255 255
GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS support GPRS not support GPRS
Support Baseband FH
and EDGE Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
simultaneously
EDGE Support Cell_Common No No No
8PSK power
Cell_Common 0 0 0
attenuation grade
Support NACC Cell_Common No No No
Support PACKET SI
Cell_Common No No No
STATUS
Support NC2 Cell_Common No No No
PCU Support 64
Neighbor Cells
Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support Support
Cellband Cell_Common 0 2 0
RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan As per plan
Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support
Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support
Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 00000001 1
As per frequency As per frequency As per frequency

FH MODE Cell_Common
plan plan plan
DL DTX Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
MAX TA(bit period(1

Cell_Common 62 62 62
bit=0.55km))
Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal cell Normal Cell
Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None None
Enhanced Concentric
Cell_Common No Yes Yes
Allowed
Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Concentric Cell Normal cell
Attributes of UL And OL
Cell_Common NONE NONE NONE
Subcells
BCCH Concentric
Cell_Common None Underlaid Subcell None
Attribute
UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use
Call Reestablishment
Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
Forbidden
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1 1
TCH Immediate
Assignment
Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

SDCCH Dynamic
Allocation Allowed
UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
Power Amplifier
Allow Dynamic Voltage

Adjustment
Depend on Depend on invidual

TRX Index TRx 65535
invidual site site

TRX No. TRx 255
invidual site site

Cell Index TRx None
invidual site site

Site Index TRx 65535
invidual site site

Board Type TRx None
invidual site site
Active State TRx Activated Activated Activated
Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto Auto

Cabinet No. TRx 0
invidual site site
Subrack No. TRx 0
invidual site site

Slot No. TRx None
invidual site site

TEI TRx 0
invidual site site

Out-BSC Subrack No. TRx 0
invidual site site

Out-BSC Slot No. TRx None
invidual site site

Out-BSC Port No. TRx None
invidual site site
Out-BSC Timeslot No. Depend on Depend on invidual

TRx 255
(8K) invidual site site

RSL In Site Port No. TRx 255
invidual site site
RSL In Site Timeslot Depend on Depend on invidual

TRx 255
No.(8K) invidual site site

RSL Logic No. TRx 2048
invidual site site
As per frequency As per frequency

Hop Type TRx None
plan plan
Power Level TRx 0 0 0
Depends on
Depends on BTS/site
Power Type TRx BTS/site Default
configuration
configuration
Depends on
HW_Concentric Depends on BTS/site
TRx BTS/site None
Attribute configuration
configuration
TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0 Level0
Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable Enable
TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes Yes No
TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0 0
Wireless Link Alarm

TRx No No No
Flag
Abnormal Release
TRx 100 100 100
Statistic Base
Abnormal Warn
TRx 100 100 100
Threshold
Abnormal Release
TRx 50 50 50
Threshold
Statical Period of No-

TRx 48 48 48
traffic(5min)
Wireless Link Alarm

TRx Yes Yes Yes
Critical Permit
WLA Prompting
TRx 12 12 12
Recover Period(5min)
Begin Time of WLA

TRx 8 8 8
Detection(hour)
End Time of WLA
TRx 22 22 22
Detection(hour)
Up Down Balance Basic

TRx 8 8 8
Difference
Up Down Balance
TRx 30 30 30
Floating Range
Up Down Balance
TRx 80 80 80
Alarm Threshold
Depends on
Depends on BTS/site
Receive Mode TRx BTS/site None
configuration
configuration
Depends on
Depends on BTS/site
Send Mode TRx BTS/site None
configuration
configuration
Allow Shutdown of TRX

TRx Yes Yes No
Power Amplifier
Antenna Hopping Index TRx No No No
Power Finetune TRx Default Default Default
TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None None
Reverse Out-BSC Slot

TRx 255 255 255
No.
Reverse Out-BSC Port

TRx 255 255 255
No.
Reverse Out-BSC
TRx 255 255 255
Timeslot No.(8K)
Reverse RSL In Site
TRx 255 255 255
Port No.
Reverse RSL In Site

TRx 255 255 255
Timeslot No.(8K)
Transmission Type of
TRx TDM TDM TDM
Abis Interface
Maximum PDCH
TRx 8 8 8
numbers of carrier
MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32 32
Co-TRX for Dynamic

Transmission TRx 255 255 255
Diversity(PBT)
InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535
HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535
TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255 255
XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0 0
TRX Ability TRx 1 1
PhysicalPassNo TRx 1 1
Priority TRx NONE

QTRU Priority TRx 255 255
RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535
Time Slot Power

TRx 0 0 0
Rerserve
Allow Dynamic Voltage

Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
Adjustment
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
Power Amplifier
MAX TA(bit period(1

Basic_Parameter 63 63 62
bit=0.55km))
DL DTX Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 1 1 1
DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
TCH Immediate
Basic_Parameter No No No
Assignment
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 1 8
Call Reestablishment
Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
Forbidden
UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use
GSM900 Band Traffic

CH_MGT 25 25 25
Load Share Threshold
Channel Assignment
Allowed for Insufficient CH_MGT No No Yes
Power
Qtru Down Link Path

CH_MGT 4 4 4
Loss Compensation
Qtru Estimate Bts

CH_MGT 35 35 35
Power
Qtru Down Power

CH_MGT 3 3 3
Inadequate Last Time
Qtru Down Power

CH_MGT 5 5 5
Inadequate Stat Time
Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None None
Observed time of
uplink received level CH_MGT 5 5 5
difference
Duration of uplink
received level CH_MGT 4 4 4
difference
Smooth factor of uplink

CH_MGT 6 6 6
received level
Threshold of the
difference between CH_MGT 100 100 100
uplink received levels
Allow Rate Selection
Based on
CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Overlaid/Underlaid
Subcell Load
Tch Traffic Busy

CH_MGT 50 50 50
Underlay Threshold
Busy Threshold of TCH

Traffic in Overlaid CH_MGT 50 50 50
Subcell
Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close
Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close
Fix Abis Prior Choose

CH_MGT 80 80 80
Abis Load Threshold(%)
Flex Abis Prior Choose

CH_MGT 80 80 80
Abis Load Threshold(%)
TCH req suspend

CH_MGT 60 60 60
interval(s)
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell

CH_MGT 40 40 40
Load Threshold
AMR TCH/H Prior

CH_MGT As per plan As per plan As per plan
Allowed
Update Freq.of CH
CH_MGT 2 2 2
Record
Update Period of CH
CH_MGT 30 30 30
Record(min)
Filter Length for SDCCH

CH_MGT 2 2 2
Qual.
Filter Length for SDCCH As per frequency As per frequency As per frequency
CH_MGT
Level plan plan plan
Filter Length for TCH

CH_MGT Yes Yes 6
Qual.

CH_MGT 6 6 4
Level
Interf.of DL
CH_MGT 40 40 40
Qual.Threshold
Interf.of DL Level
CH_MGT 25 25 25
Threshold
Interf.of UL Qual.
CH_MGT 40 40 40
Threshold
Interf.of UL Level
CH_MGT 10 10 10
Threshold
History Record Priority

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Allowed
Allocation TRX Priority

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Allowed
Active CH Interf.
CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Meas.Allowed
Interf. Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
TCH Traffic Busy

CH_MGT 1 50 50
Threshold(%)
TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No No

Dynamic Transmission
Diversity(PBT) CH_MGT Not Support DPBT Not Support
Supported
Channel Allocate Capability Capability

CH_MGT Capability preferred
Strategy preferred preferred
Enhanced TCH Adjust

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Allowed
TCH Minimum
CH_MGT 60 60 60
Recovery Time(s)
Cell SDCCH Channel

CH_MGT 80 80 80
Maximum
Idle SDCCH Threshold

CH_MGT 2 2 2
N1
AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control 2 2 2
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control 10 10 15
adj.hyst3(H)
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control 4 4 4
adj.hyst2(H)
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control 2 2 4
adj.hyst1(H)
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th3(H)
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th2(H)
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th1(H)
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst3(H)
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control 4 4 4
adj.hyst2(H)
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control 2 2 4
adj.hyst1(H)
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th3(H)
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th2(H)
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th1(H)
AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 1101 1101 1101
AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2 2
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control 6 6 3
adj.hyst3(F)
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control 4 4 3
adj.hyst2(F)
AMR DL Coding Rate

Call_Control 2 2 2
adj.hyst1(F)
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th3(F)
AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th2(F)
AMR DL Coding Rate
Call_Control As per plan As per plan As per plan
adj.th1(F)
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control 5 5 1
adj.hyst3(F)
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control 2 2 2
adj.hyst2(F)
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control 4 4 2
adj.hyst1(F)
AMR UL Coding Rate As per frequency As per frequency As per frequency

Call_Control
adj.th3(F) plan plan plan
AMR UL Coding Rate

Call_Control Yes Yes 18
adj.th2(F)
AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th1(F)
AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 11100100 11100100 11100100
Max Assignment Retry

Call_Control 2 2 1
Times
Frequency Band of
Call_Control Same Band Different Band Different Band
Reassign
Short Message
Call_Control No No No
Downlink Disabled
Immediate Assignment
Opt.
Abis Resource
Adjustment TCHH Call_Control No No No
Function Switch
Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No No
Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes Yes
TDD Cell Threshold Call_Control 1 0 0
TDD Cell offset Call_Control 0 0 0
Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control 1 1 1
TDD Cell Reselect

Call_Control 8 8 8
Diversity(dB)
FDD Reporting
Call_Control 0 0 0
Threshold
FDD Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0
1800 Reporting
Call_Control 0 0 0
Threshold
1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0
900 Reporting
Call_Control 0 0 0
Threshold
900 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0
Qsearch C Call_Control 15 15 15
Scale Order Call_Control +0dB +0dB +0dB
Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control No No No
3G Search PRIO Call_Control Yes Yes Yes
Qsearch P Call_Control 15 15 15
FDD Qmin Call_Control 0 0 0
FDD MULTIRAT
Call_Control 2 2 2
Reporting
FDD REP QUANT Call_Control RSCP RSCP RSCP
FDD Q Offset Call_Control 8 8 8
Qsearch C Initial Call_Control Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I
Qsearch I Call_Control 15 15 15
Serving Band Reporting Call_Control 3 3 3
Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1 1
Power Deviation
Call_Control Yes Yes Yes
Indication
MBR Call_Control 0 0 0
ECSC Call_Control No Yes NO
Radio Link
Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control 24 24 52
(480ms))
Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No No
Special Access Control

Call_Control 00000 00000 00000
Class
Common Access
Call_Control 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000
Control Class
MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 Times 4 Times 4 Times
Max Transmit Times of

Call_Control 2 2 2
Imm_Ass
Max Delay of Imm_Ass

Call_Control 4 4 4
Retransmit(ms)
Use Imm_Ass
Retransmit Parameter
N200 of FACCH/Full
rate
N200 of FACCH/Half
rate
N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 23

N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5 5
N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5 5
N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5 5
Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No No
T200 SDCCH
SAPI3(5ms)
T200 SACCH
SDCCH(10ms)
T200 SACCH TCH

SAPI3(10ms)
T200 SACCH TCH

SAPI0(10ms)
T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50
T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50
T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60
RACH Min.Access
Call_Control -115 -115 -115
Level(dbm)
Random Access Error

Threshold
Allowed &
TRX Aiding Function Allowed & Recover TRX Aiding Not
Call_Control Recover When
Control When Check Res Allowed
Check Res
Speech Version Call_Control 11 11 11
AHR Radio Link

(480ms))
AFR Radio Link

(480ms))
AHR SACCH Multi-

Frames(SACCH period Call_Control 24 24 32
(480ms))
AFR SACCH Multi-

(480ms))
Directed Retry Load

Access Threshold
Assignment Cell Load

Call_Control Disable Disable Disable
Judge Enable
Paging Times Call_Control 2 2 4
RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16 16
SACCH Multi-
(480ms))
T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 7
Max Resend Times of

HO 30 30 30
Phy.Info.
TDD Better 3G Cell HO
HO No No 0
Allowed
TDD 3G Better Cell HO

HO 4 4 4
Valid Time(s)
TDD 3G Better Cell HO

HO 5 5 5
Watch Time(s)
TDD RSCP Threshold

HO 50 50 50
for Better 3G Cell HO
TDD HO Preference
HO 25 25 25
Threshold for 2G Cell
TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Preference for 2G

HO
Preference Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold
Quick Handover
HO 68 68 68
Offset(dB)
Quick Handover Punish

HO 63 63 63
Value(dB)
Quick Handover Punish

HO 10 10 10
Time(s)
Ignore Measurement
HO 1 1 1
Report Number
Neighbor Cell Filter

HO 4 4 4
Length MR Number
Serving Cell Filter

HO 4 4 4
Length MR Number
Quick Handover Last

HO 3 3 3
Time (0.5s)
Quick Handover Static
HO 4 4 4
Time(0.5s)
Quick Move Speed

HO 80 80 80
Threshold(m/s)
Quick Handover Down

HO 63 63 63
Trigger Level(dB)
Quick Handover Up
HO 63 63 63
Trigger Level(dB)
Inner Cell Serious

HO 90 90 90
OverLoad Threshold(%)
Number of Satisfactory
HO As per plan As per plan As per plan
Measurements(s)
Total Number of
HO 5 5 5
Measurements(s)
Inter UL And OL
Subcells HO Penalty HO 5 5 5
Time(s)
Outgoing OL Subcell
HO 25 25 25
HO level Threshold(dB)
Incoming OL Subcell As per frequency As per frequency As per frequency

HO
HO level Threshold(dB) plan plan plan
Step Length of OL
HO Yes Yes 5
Subcell Load HO(dB)
OL Subcell Load
HO 10 10 10
Diversity HO Period(s)
Load HO of OL Subcell
HO No No No
to UL Subcell Enabled
Modified Step Length of
HO 1 1 1
UL Load HO Period(s)
Step Length of UL
HO 5 5 5
Subcell Load HO(dB)
UL Subcell Load
Hierarchical HO HO 5 5 5
Period(s)
Distance Hysteresis
Between Boundaries of HO 2 2 2
UL And OL Subcells(dB)
Distance Between
Boundaries of UL And HO 10 10 10
OL Subcells(dB)
Allowed Flow Control

Level of UL And OL HO 10 10 10
Subcell HO
UL Subcell Serious
HO 90 90 90
Overload Threshold(%)
UL Subcell General
HO 1 80 80
Overload Threshold(%)
Assignment
Optimization of OL HO No No No
Subcell Allowed Or Not
Assignment
Optimization of UL HO Yes Yes Yes
Subcell Allowed Or Not
UL Subcell Lower Load

HO 50 50 50
Threshold(%)
Better 3G Cell HO
HO No No No
Allowed
3G Better Cell HO Valid

HO 4 4 4
Time(s)
3G Better Cell HO
HO 5 5 5
Watch Time(s)
Ec/No Threshold for

HO 35 35 35
Better 3G Cell HO
RSCP Threshold for

HO 50 50 50
Better 3G Cell HO
HO Preference
HO 25 25 25
Threshold for 2G Cell
Inter-RAT HO Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Preference for 2G

HO
Preference Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold
Ps UtoO HO Received
HO 35 35 35
Level Threshold
Ps OtoU HO Received
HO 25 25 25
Level Threshold
ReceiveQualThrshAMR
HO 60 60 60
HR
ReceiveQualThrshAMRF
HO 65 65 65
R
En Iuo In Cell Load

HO 5 5 5
Classification HO Step
En Iuo In Cell Load

HO 5 5 5
Classification HO Period
En Iuo Out Cell Serious

HO 90 90 90
OverLoad Threshold
En Iuo Out Cell General

HO 85 85 85
OverLoad Threshold
En Iuo Out Cell Low
HO 30 30 20
Load Threshold
MaxRetry Time after

HO 3 3 3
UtoO Fail
Penalty Time after

HO 10 10 10
OtoU HO Fail(s)
Penalty Time after

HO 40 40 40
UtoO HO Fail(s)
Penalty Time of UtoO

HO 10 10 10
HO(s)
Underlay HO Step Level HO 5 5 5
Underlay HO Step
HO 5 5 5
Period(s)
UtoO Traffic HO
HO Yes Yes Yes
Allowed
UtoO HO Received
HO 32 32 35
Level Threshold
OtoU HO Received
HO 18 18 25
Level Threshold
Incoming-to-BSC HO
HO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell
Optimum Layer
Pref. Subcell in HO of System System

HO System Optimization
Intra-BSC Optimization Optimization
TA Threshold of Imme-
HO 0 0 0
Assign Pref.
TA Pref. of Imme-
HO No No No
Assign Allowed
TA Threshold of
HO 63 63 63
Assignment Pref.
Assign-optimum-level
HO 35 35 35
Threshold
System System
Assign Optimum Layer HO System Optimization
Optimization Optimization
UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4 4
UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5
TA Hysteresis HO 0 0 0
TA Threshold HO 63 63 63
RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 50 60
RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5 5
RX_LEV Threshold HO 35 35 35
UO Signal Intensity
HO 0 0 0
Difference
TA for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

RX_QUAL for UO HO
HO No No No
Allowed
RX_LEV for UO HO
HO Yes Yes Yes
Allowed
OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Load Threshold for

HO 80 80 80
TIGHT BCCH HO
RX_QUAL Threshold for

HO 4 4 3
TIGHT BCCH HO
K Bias HO 0 0 0
UL Expected Level at
HO 30 30 30
HO Access
Penalty Time on Fast

HO 40 40 40
Moving HO(s)
Penalty on MS Fast
HO 30 30 30
Moving HO
Interval for
HO 6 6 6
Consecutive HO Jud.
Forbidden time after

HO 20 20 20
MAX Times
MAX Consecutive HO
HO 3 3 3
Times
MS Fast-moving Time
HO 15 15 15
Threshold
MS Fast-moving Valid
HO 2 2 2
Cells
MS Fast-moving Watch
HO 3 3 3
Cells
Load HO Step Level HO 5 5 5
Load HO Step Period HO 10 10 10
Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25 25
Load Req.on Candidate

HO 75 75 75
Cell
Load HO Threshold HO 85 85 85
System Flux Threshold

HO 10 10 10
for Load HO
ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60
DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60
ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65
DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65
RXLEVOff HO 5 5 5
RXQUAL12 HO 50 50 50
RXQUAL9 HO 53 53 53
RXQUAL8 HO 54 54 54
RXQUAL7 HO 55 55 55
RXQUAL6 HO 56 56 56
RXQUAL5 HO 57 57 57
RXQUAL4 HO 58 58 58
RXQUAL3 HO 59 59 59
RXQUAL2 HO 60 60 60
RXQUAL1 HO 70 70 70
Cons.No Dl Mr.HO
HO 8 8 8
Allowed Limit
No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO
HO 60 60 60
Limit
No Dl Mr.HO Allowed HO No No No
Filter Parameter B HO 0 0 0
Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10 10
UL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60
DL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60
Emergency HO TA
HO 255 255 255
Threshold
DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open Open
CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255 255
UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10 10
RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5 5

HO 6 6 6
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK

HO 2 2 2
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
Penalty Time after AMR

HO 30 30 30
TCHF-H HO Fail(s)

HO 6 6 6
REP_QUANT

HO 2 2 2
REP_QUANT

HO 6 6 6
CV_BEP

HO 2 2 2
CV_BEP
HO 6 6 6
MEAN_BEP

HO 2 2 2
MEAN_BEP
Penalty Time after TA

HO 30 30 30
HO(s)
Penalty Level after TA

HO 63 63 63
HO
Penalty Time after BQ

HO 15 15 15
HO(s)
Penalty Level after BQ

HO 63 63 63
HO
Penalty Level after HO

HO 30 30 30
Fail
Filter Length for TA HO 6 6 4
Filter Length for Ncell

HO 6 6 4
RX_LEV

HO 3 3 2
Qual

HO 3 3 2
Level

HO 6 6 4
Qual

HO 6 6 4
Level
Allowed M.R Number
HO 4 4 4
Lost
Min Power Level For

HO 25 25 16
Direct Try
Sent Freq.of Twice every Twice every

HO Twice every second
preprocessed MR second second
Transfer BS/MS Power

HO Yes Yes Yes
Class
Transfer Original MR HO Yes Yes No
MR.Preprocessing HO No No No
MS Power Prediction
HO No No No
after HO
Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO
HO No No No
ALLowed
Min Interval for

HO 6 6 4
Emerg.HOs
Min Interval for

HO 6 6 4
Consecutive HOs
Min Interval for SDCCH

HO 2 2 2
HOs
Min Interval for TCH

HO 4 4 2
HOs
ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open Open
TIGHT BCCH HO Valid

HO 2 2 2
Time(s)
TIGHT BCCH HO Watch

HO 3 3 3
Time(s)
Quick Handover Enable HO NO NO NO
H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10 10
F2H HO Threshold HO 30 30 25
Intracell F-H HO Last

HO 4 4 4
Time(s)
Intracell F-H HO Stat

HO 5 5 5
Time(s)
Intracell F-H HO
HO Yes Yes YES
Allowed
Min DL Power on HO
HO 15 15 15
Candidate Cell
Min UP Power on HO
HO 10 10 10
Candidate Cell
Inter-layer HO
HO 3 3 3
Hysteresis
Inter-layer HO
HO 25 25 25
Threshold
Inter-System Handover
HO No No No
Enable
PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2
PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3
Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2
Layer HO Watch
HO 3 3 3
Time(s)
Edge HO AdjCell Valid

HO 2 2 2
Time(s)
Edge HO AdjCell Watch

HO 3 3 3
Time(s)
Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2
Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3
Edge HO DL RX_LEV
HO 20 20 20
Threshold
Edge HO UL RX_LEV
HO 10 10 10
Threshold
Interference HO
HO Yes Yes Yes
Allowed
Concentric Circles HO
HO Yes Yes Yes
Allowed
TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Level HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Rx_Level_Drop HO
HO No No No
Allowed
MS Fast Moving HO
HO No No No
Allowed
Load HO Allowed HO No No No
Intracell HO Allowed HO No No No
SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No No
Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO Yes Yes Yes
PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 0
TO Idle_Mode 0 0 0
ACS Idle_Mode No No No
CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0 0
Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode No No No
PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes
CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB 6dB
Period of Periodic
Location Update(6 Idle_Mode 60 60 20
minutes)
4 Multiframe 2 Multiframe
BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period
Period Period
BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 2 2 2
NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 11111111 11111111 11111111
Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode No No No
Tx-integer Idle_Mode 32 32 32
ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes
Timer for UL Data

Other_Properties 10 10 10
Forward(ms)
WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000 26000
WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000 34000
T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000
T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 10
TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000 15000
T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 1000
T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000
ImmAss A Interf
Creation Timer(ms)
Send Classmark
Enquiring Result To Other_Properties No No No
MSC Enable
Enquire Classmark
After In-BSC Handover Other_Properties No No No
Enable
Base Hop Support

Other_Properties No No No
Close TRX Allowed
Qtru Signal Merge

Switch
MAX Paging Message

Number 0f Cell In Other_Properties 220 220 220
Period
Average Paging
Message Number 0f Other_Properties 180 180 180
Cell In Period
Paging Numbers of one

Optimizing Msgs
Interval For Sending

Paging Optimizing Other_Properties 2 2 2
Msgs
Paging Messages
Optimize at Abis Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Forced turn-on
Interface
Interference Band Interference Band Interference Band

Interfere Band Stat
Other_Properties Measurement Measurement Measurement
Algorithm Type
Algorithm II Algorithm II Algorithm II
Cell Out-of-Service
Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes
Alarm Switch
Lower-level sublink
resources preemption Other_Properties No No No
switch
Sublink resources
preemption switch
Force MS to Send Ho
Access SWITCH
IntraCellHo to Ass
SWITCH
Frequency Scan Result Maximum/Mean Maximum/Mean Maximum/Mean

Other_Properties
Type Value Value Value
Drop Optimize Intra-

Cell Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize Intra-

Bsc Out-Cell Handover Other_Properties 1 1 1
Timeout
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc

Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc

Handover Timeout
Drop Optimize
Resource Check
Drop Optimize No MR
For Long Time
Drop Optimize Forced

Handover Failure
Drop Optimize
Equipment Failure
Drop Optimize ABIS

Territorial Link Failure
Drop Optimize Release
Indication
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure Other_Properties 1 1 1
(other)
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure
(radio resource not
available)
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure (OM Other_Properties 1 1 1
intervention)
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure (HO Other_Properties 1 1 1
access fail)
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure Other_Properties 1 1 1
(radio link fail)
Drop Optimize Error

Indication (sequence Other_Properties 1 1 1
error)
Drop Optimize Error

Indication (unsolicited Other_Properties 1 1 1
DM response)
Drop Optimize Error

Indication (T200 Other_Properties 1 1 1
timeout)
Directly Magnifier Site

Flag
Aiding Delay Protect

Time(min)
Abis Flow Control

Permitted
Support Half Rate Other_Properties Yes Yes No

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties 5 5 5
PWRC Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes
ActGene Other_Properties 5 5 5
PS LowPri ServicePRI Other_Properties 6 6 6
PS HighPRI ServicePRI Other_Properties 4 4 4
CS Data ServicePRI Other_Properties 5 5 5
CS Voice ServicePRI Other_Properties 3 3 3
Included Angle(Degree) Other_Properties 360 360 360
Antenna Azimuth
Angle(Degree)
Average RACH Load

Timeslot Number
Overload Indication
Period
CCCH Load Threshold Other_Properties 80 80 80
CCCH Load Indication

Period(s)
Radio Resource Report
Period(s)
Frequency Adjust Value Other_Properties 36671 36671 36671
Frequency Adjust
Other_Properties NO NO NO
Switch
VSWR TRX Error

Threshold
VSWR TRX Unadjusted

Threshold
Power Output
Reduction Threshold
Power Output Error

Threshold
DC Bias Voltage
Threshold
Frame Start Time Other_Properties 65535 65535 65535
Max RC Power
Reduction(2dB)
Interf.Calculation
Period(SACCH Other_Properties 20 20 20
period(480ms))
Interf. Band Threshold

5 (-dBm)

4 (-dBm)
3 (-dBm)

2 (-dBm)

1 (-dBm)

0 (-dBm)
Cell Direct Try

Forbidden Threshold
SMCBC DRX Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes
Data service Allowed Other_Properties 118 118 118
Power boost before HO

Other_Properties StartUp StartUp not StartUp
enabled or not
Voice quality report

Other_Properties report report not report
switch
Diversity LNA Bypass

Other_Properties 255 255 Yes
Permitted
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain

Power_Control 53 53 53
8(dB)

7(dB)

6(dB)
5(dB)

4(dB)

3(dB)

2(dB)

Power_Control 0 0 0
1(dB)
HwIII UL MAX
Power_Control 8 8 8
UpStep(dB)
HwIII UL MAX
Power_Control 8 8 8
DownStep(dB)
HwIII UL AHS Rex

Qual.Lower Power_Control 12 12 12
Threshold(dB)
HwIII UL AHS Rex

Qual.Upper Power_Control 16 16 16
Threshold(dB)
HwIII UL AFS Rex

Threshold(dB)
HwIII UL AFS Rex

Threshold(dB)
HwIII UL HS Rex
Threshold(dB)
HwIII UL HS Rex
Threshold(dB)
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.
Lower Threshold(dB)
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB)
HwIII UL RexLev Lower

Threshold
HwIII UL RexLev Upper

Threshold
HwIII UL Rex
Power_Control 6 6 6
Qual.Adjust Factor
HwIII UL RexLev Adjust

Power_Control 4 4 4
Factor
HwIII UL Rex Qual.

Power_Control 1 1 1
Slide Window
HwIII UL RexLev Slide

Power_Control 1 1 1
Window
HwIII UL Rex
Qual.Exponent Filter Power_Control 3 3 3
Length
HwIII UL RexLev
Power_Control 3 3 3
Exponent Filter Length
HwIII DL MAX UpStep

Power_Control 8 8 8
(dB)
HwIII DL MAX
Power_Control 8 8 8
DownStep(dB)
HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.

Lower Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL AHS Rex
Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL AFS Rex

Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL AFS Rex

Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual.

Lower Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.

Lower Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB)
HwIII DL RexLev Lower

Threshold
HwIII DL RexLev Upper

Threshold
HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Power_Control 6 6 6
Adjust Factor
HwIII DL RexLev Adjust

Power_Control 6 6 6
Factor
HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Power_Control 1 1 1
Slide Window
HwIII DL RexLev Slide

Power_Control 1 1 1
Window
HwIII DL Rex Qual.
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII DL RexLev
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII Traffic Channel

Power_Control 3 3 3
Discard MR Number
HwIII Signal Channel

Power_Control 1 1 1
Discard MR Number
HwIII Down Link Power

Power_Control 3 3 3
Control Adjust Period
HwIII Up Link Power

Power_Control 3 3 3
Control Adjust Period
HwIII Number of lost

Power_Control 5 5 5
MRs allowed
AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16
AMR DL Qual Bad

Power_Control 0 0 0
UpLEVDiff
AMR DL Qual Bad Trig

Power_Control 5 5 5
Threshold
AMR UL Qual. Bad

Power_Control 0 0 0
UpLEVDiff
AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig

Power_Control 5 5 5
Threshold
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC

Power_Control 8 8 8
Value by Qual.
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC
Value by RX_LEV
AMR MAX Down Adj. PC

Power_Control 4 4 4
Value by Qual.
AMR MAX Down Adj.

Power_Control 4 4 4
Value Qual. Zone 2
AMR MAX Down Adj.

Power_Control 4 4 4
Value Qual. Zone 1
AMR MAX Down Adj.

Power_Control 4 4 4
Value Qual. Zone 0
AMR DL Qual. Lower

Power_Control 2 2 3
Threshold
AMR DL Qual. Upper

Power_Control 0 0 1
Threshold
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower

Threshold
AMR DL RX_LEV Upper

Threshold
AMR UL Qual. Lower

Power_Control 2 2 3
Threshold
AMR ULQual. Upper

Power_Control 0 0 1
Threshold
AMR UL RX_LEV Lower

Threshold
AMR UL RX_LEV Upper

Threshold
AMR DL MR. Number
Power_Control 2 2 0
Predicted
AMR UL MR. Number

Power_Control 2 2 0
Predicted
AMR MR.
Power_Control Yes Yes Yes
Compensation Allowed
AMR Filter Length for

Power_Control 6 6 6
DL Qual.

Power_Control 6 6 6
UL Qual

Power_Control 6 6 6
DL RX_LEV

Power_Control 6 6 6
UL RX_LEV
AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3
BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0
DL Qual. Bad Trig

Power_Control 5 5 5
Threshold
UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0
UL Qual. Bad Trig

Power_Control 5 5 5
Threshold
MAX Up Adj. PC Value
Power_Control 8 8 8
by Qual.
MAX Up Adj. PC Value

by RX_LEV
MAX Down Adj. PC

Power_Control 4 4 4
Value by Qual.
MAX Down Adj.Value

Power_Control 4 4 4
Qual.Zone 2
MAX Down Adj.Value

Power_Control 4 4 4
Qual.Zone 1
MAX Down Adj.Value

Power_Control 4 4 4
Qual.Zone 0
DL MR. Number
Power_Control 2 2 0
Predicted
UL MR. Number
Power_Control 2 2 0
Predicted
MR. Compensation
Power_Control Yes Yes Yes
Allowed
Filter Length for DL

Power_Control 5 5 5
Qual.
Filter Length for UL

Power_Control 5 5 5
Qual.
Filter Length for DL

Power_Control 5 5 5
RX_LEV
Filter Length for UL

Power_Control 5 5 5
RX_LEV
Power Control HWII Power HW-II Power
Power_Control HWII Power Control
Algorithm Switch Control Control
DL Qual. Lower
Power_Control 2 2 3
Threshold
DL Qual. Upper
Power_Control 0 0 1
Threshold
DL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold
DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold
UL Qual. Lower
Power_Control 2 2 3
Threshold
UL Qual. Upper
Power_Control 0 0 1
Threshold
UL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold
UL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold
PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3
Constant of Filtering
the Collision Signal
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Strength for Power
Control
Measured Receive
Data_In_PCU pdch pdch pdch
Power Level Channel
BTS Power Attenuation

Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB -2dB
on PBCCH
Signal Strength Filter
Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Period in Transfer Mode
Signal Strength Filter

Period in Idle Mode
Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14 14
Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Maximum Value of
N3105
Maximum Value of
Data_In_PCU 3 3 3
N3103
Maximum Value of
N3101
Release Delay of
Data_In_PCU 2400 2400 2400
Downlink TBF(ms)
Inactive Period of
Extended Uplink Data_In_PCU 2000 2000 2000
TBF(ms)
Release Delay of Non-

extended Uplink Data_In_PCU 120 120 120
TBF(ms)
Load Reselect Level

Threshold
GPRS Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
EDGE 8PSK Quality

Threshold
EDGE GMSK Quality
Data_In_PCU 7 7 7
Threshold
Cell Reselect Interval(s) Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Normal Cell Reselection

Worsen Level Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Threshold
Normal Cell Reselection

Watch Period
Cell Normal Reselection

Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit
Allowed
Cell Load Reselection

Allowed
Cell Urgent Reselection

Allowed
2G/3G Cell Reselection Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Preference for 2G

Data_In_PCU
Strategy Cell Cell Cell
Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Allowed Measure
Data_In_PCU 4 4 4
Report Missed Number
Load Reselection
Receive Threshold(%)
Load Reselection Start

Threshold(%)
MS Rx Quality Worsen
Ratio Threshold(%)
MS Rx Quality Statistic
Data_In_PCU 200 200 200
Threshold
Cell Penalty Last

Time(s)
Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30 30
Cell Reselection
Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Hysterisis
Min Access Level

Threshold
Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support
No handover
No handover No handover
between
PS Concentric Cell HO between underlaid between underlaid
Data_In_PCU underlaid subcell
Strategy subcell and overlaid subcell and
and overlaid
subcell overlaid subcell
subcell
Transmission Delay of
Data_In_PCU 650 650 650
POC Service
Max. GBR for POC

Service
Min. GBR for POC

Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Service
Move Packet
Assignment Down to Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support
BTS
Move Immediate
Assignment Down to Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support
BTS
Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support
Downlink Default MCS
Data_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6 MCS6
Type
Downlink Fixed MCS

Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED
Type
Uplink Default MCS

Data_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2 MCS2
Type
Uplink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED
BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Link Quality Control

Data_In_PCU LA LA LA
Mode
Down TBF threshold

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
From CS4 to CS3
Down TBF threshold

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
From CS3 to CS2
Down TBF threshold

From CS2 to CS1
Down TBF threshold

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
From CS3 to CS4
Down TBF threshold

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
From CS2 to CS3
Down TBF threshold

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
From CS1 to CS2
Downlink Default CS
Data_In_PCU CS2 CS2 CS2
Type
Downlink Fixed CS
Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED
Type
Up TBF threshold From

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
CS4 to CS3

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
CS3 to CS2

CS2 to CS1

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
CS3 to CS4

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
CS2 to CS3

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
CS1 to CS2
Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1 CS1
Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED
Background Service
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Priority Weight
THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Timer of Releasing Abis

Timeslot
Reservation Threshold
of Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Conversion
All dynamic All dynamic All dynamic

Level of Preempting
Data_In_PCU channels can be channels can be channels can be
Dynamic Channel
pre-empted pre-empted preempted.
Timer of Releasing Idle

Dynamic Channel
Dynamic Channel only convert

Only convert at
Conversion Parameter Data_In_PCU Only convert at UL dynamic channel
UL
of Concentric Cell at UL
PDCH Downlink
Multiplex Threshold
PDCH Uplink Multiplex

Threshold
Downlink Multiplex
Threshold of Dynamic Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Channel Conversion
Uplink Multiplex
Threshold of Dynamic Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Channel Conversion
Maximum Ratio
Threshold of PDCHs in Data_In_PCU 30 30 30
a Cell
Report the Report the Report the
MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCU frequencies of six frequencies of six frequencies of six
strongest cells strongest cells strongest cells
Threshold of HCS
Data_In_PCU -110dB -110dB -110dB
Signal Strength
Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Maximum TX Power for

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Access PCH
Minimum Receiving
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
level for Access
Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Not Exclusive
Permit Cell
Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCU Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access
Access
Accessorial Hysteresis
of Cell Selection In New Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB
Routing Area
Cell Reselection
Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec
Forbidden Time
Allow MS to Access to
Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes
another Cell
Exceptional Rule for

Data_In_PCU 0 0 0
GPRS Reselect Offset
GPRS Cell Reselect

Hysteresis Applied to Data_In_PCU c31standard c31standard c31standard
C31 Criterion or not
GPRS Cell Reselect

Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB
Hysteresis
Support PSI Status
Data_In_PCU No No No
Message
Allow MR Command or
Data_In_PCU No No No
not
PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16 16
Extension Transmission
Timeslots of Random Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Access
Minimum Timeslots
between Two
Successive Channel
Requests
Maximum
Retransmissions for Data_In_PCU 7 7 7
Radio Priority 4
Maximum
Radio Priority 3
Maximum
Radio Priority 2
Maximum
Radio Priority 1
Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0 0
PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4 4
PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Cell Reselection MR
Period in Packet Data_In_PCU 0.96sec 0.96sec 0.96sec
Transfer Mode
Cell Reselection MR
Period in Packet Idle Data_In_PCU 15.36sec 15.36sec 15.36sec
Mode
Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.24sec 0.24sec 0.24sec
GPRS Reselection
Data_In_PCU -2db -2db -2dB
Offset
GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec
GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB 10dB
Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec 60sec
Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1 type1
Interference Frequency Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Extension
Measurement Data_In_PCU em0 em0 em0
Command
BSS Paging
Coordination
Support 11BIT EGPRS

Access
Routing Area Color

Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Code
Packet access of Packet access of Packet access of

Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCU
level 4 level 4 level 4
Support
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on Data_In_PCU No No No
CCCH
Network Control Mode Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0 nc0
Pan Max. Data_In_PCU 12 12 12
Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4 4
Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Control Acknowledge Four access Four access pulses Four access pulses
Data_In_PCU
Type pulses by default by default by default
Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit 8bit
Max. Duration of
Data_In_PCU 4 4 4s
DRX(s)
T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms
T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms
Network
Network Operation Network Operation Network Operation
Data_In_PCU Operation Mode
Mode Mode II Mode II
II
Description
This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by
Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively.
The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m
This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China
is 460.
This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).
This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom
operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique
nationwide.
The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).
This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with
the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.
This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the
same layer have the same priority.
For details, refer to Layer of the Cell.
This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not
Activated or Activated.
This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the
Pb interface.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a
cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU)
must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus
The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE
simultaneously.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with
GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM
evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which
improv
This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by
an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2
dB.
The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits
This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change
(NACC) function.
In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission
mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure.
When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status
message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC
sends th
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2)
function.
In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells
to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a
This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells.

In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report
the number of neighbor cells.
For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is
Invalid and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be
reported. For other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually
modif
This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be
allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected,
it cannot be changed.
GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.
DCS1800: The cell
This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state
performs location management based on the routing area.
Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.
For example, value 0 indic
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM)
function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS
service at the same time. The function requires the support of the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function.
Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup
and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted.
This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side.
The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit
to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A
If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell
where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen
This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.

comparing the TA and the value
This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to
implement the extended cell.
A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay.
Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120
This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function.
In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position
or t
This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a
concentric cell.
If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of
the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO
This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell.

TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses
form a concentric cell.
Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL
This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This
parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the
UL subcell.
In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency
reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell.
In
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by
tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may
drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For
details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47
dBm).
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving
an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an
SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.
network. It is n
This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed.
When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may
fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs
(includi
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power
amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power
amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC.
This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS.
The following two points should be paid attention to:
1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies
the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX
numbers may be discontinuous.
2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between
them is notmust
Cell Index mandatory.
be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of
this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.
Internal 2G cells: 0-2047
This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in
a BSC.
This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS.
This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.
This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML.

The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot
of OML automatically.
This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet.

This parameter specifies the number of a subrack.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located.
This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer.
This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link
when the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.
This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is
located.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in
the TC subrack, which is connected to the local subrack.
This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the
semi-permanent link.
When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each
electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to
31.
When
This the semi-permanent
parameter specifies thelink is configured
number on the timeslot
of the out-BSC optical interface
occupiedboard,
by theeach optical
E1 port
interface board
over the Abis is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62.
interface.
The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for
synchronization and cannot be otherwise used.
The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3
specifies the first to the fourth 8 kbit/s sub-timeslot of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot.
Accordingly, the timeslot numbering is likewise.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port
occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the
timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.
This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the
RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links
share one number.
Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC.
If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell
where the TRX serves
This parameter does
specifies thenot perform
transmit FH. The
power FH
level ofcan
therealize average
TRX. The interference
greater this and
frequency
parameter diversity.
is, the smaller the transmit power is.
When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest.
Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB.
For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different.
BTS3X: 0-10
BTS3001C: 0-13
BTS3002C: 0-10
Double-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012，BTS3012AE，BTS3006C): 0-10
DBS3900
This GSM, BTS3900
parameter GSM,
specifies the BTS3900A
power levels GSM：0-10
supported by a TRX. The macro BTS and the
mini BTS support different power levels.
This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this
parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is
not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None by default.
This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment
algorithm.
This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX
automatically
This parameterfor saving power
specifies whetherwhen thecan
a cell BTS is powered
convert by batteries
full rate channels after the
to half external
rate
power supply
channels, is cut off.
or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No,
the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be
forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly
restored.
This parameter also specifies whether the channel supports the dynamic adjustment
priority in the channel assignment algorithm. In the channel assignment, the channels
on the TRX not supporting the dynamic adjustment are assigned first, to ensure the
This parameter
channels on thespecifies the power
TRX supporting theattenuation levels of the
dynamic adjustment areEDGE TRX.
used for There are 50
dynamic
levels, and the
adjustment. attenuation
Thus, between
the access levels
requests is 0.2are
of users dB.satisfied.
The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK
signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to
the BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent;
otherwise, the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent.
This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a
sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N
(the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a
timeslot that are activated).
For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released
channels exceeds Abnormal Warn Threshold, an alarm is generated.
If the percentage of abnormally released channels is less than or equal to Abnormal
Release Threshold, the BSC sends the corresponding recovery alarm.
If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel
activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.
If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel

activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is
sent.
If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the no-
traffic alarm is generated.
This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless
link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover
Period.
If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the
corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not
cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or
not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit.
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in
each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the
wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in
each day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops
detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts
again until the next
This parameter Beginthe
specifies Time of WLA
basic Detection(hour).
difference value caused by the specified level
difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up
Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink
and downlink unbalance.
Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm
Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power
This parameter
control specifies
compensation the permissible
is greater than 8+30 uplink andthan
or less downlink
8-30, balance floating
the uplink and therange
relative
downlinktoare
Upnot
Down Balanceotherwise,
balanced; Basic Difference. Theand
the uplink uplink and downlink
downlink is not balanced
are balanced.
only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range.
Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm
Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power
control compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, the uplink and the
downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced.
When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the
total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter,
the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated.
This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU.
The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four
Diversity Receiver,
This parameter or Main
specifies theDiversity.
RF transmit mode of the TRX.
The BTS3012, BTS3012AE,
The RF transmit mode can be BTS3012II, BTS3006C,
Not Support, and BTS3002E
No Combining, do not support
Power Booster Main
Technology,
Diversity.
Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter
The DBS3900orGSM
Independent and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main
Combining.
Diversity.
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY
and DPBT.
The DBS3900 GSM GRRU supports No Combining, Diversity Transmitter and
DDIVERSITY.
The BTS3900 GSM and BTS3900A GSM support No Combining, Power Booster
Technology, Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT.
The BTS3012 supports No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Power Booster
This parameter
Technology, specifies
Diversity whether the
Transmitter, BSC determines
DDIVERSITY to enable or disable the power
and DPBT.
amplifier
The BTSs of a included
not TRX based on the
above dotraffic volume.
not support the RF tranmsit modes listed above.
This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the
signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX
corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less
affected
This by Rayleigh
parameter fading
specifies thecompared
following: with those without
Currently, antenna
when the hopping.
BSC performs The
the Antenna
static
Hopping Indexon
power control corresponds
the TRX, theto step
a TRXofnumber.
increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2
dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different
tributaries, and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an
integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus, the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be
This parameter
adjusted specifies
in the step whether
of 2 dB, so thethe TRX
TRX supports
output powerantenna
may behopping.
different from the cabinet
In
topa output
GSM cell, the of
power frequency,
the BTS. frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH
Therefore, through of the of
the setting main
thisBCCH TRX. Ifathe
parameter, MSstep
finer is incan
an be
unfavorable position
provided for
or the antenna
adjusting for thetop
the cabinet main BCCH
output TRX is
power offaulty, then the MS cannot receive the
the BTS.
broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly.
The antenna hopping function enables the data on all the timeslots of the BCCH TRX to
be transmitted on the antennas of all the TRXs in the cell in turn. Thus the quality of the
BCCH TRX data received by the MS is improved and the network performance is
This parameter
enhanced. Only specifies the number of BTS
the double-transceiver the out-BSC slot wherewith
can be configured the BSC interfacehopping
the antenna board
is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that
function.
holds the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC.
This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must
This
be setparameter specifies
to the number theslot
of the number ofconfigured
that is the out-BSC port
with where
the the BSC
interface interface board
board.
is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on
the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC.
When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each
electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to
31.
When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the optical interface board, each optical
interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL
timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port
occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the
timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.
This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2-
HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs
on a TRX.
This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the
current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no
TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX.
This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC
channel connects to the BTS TMU.
This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU.
This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC
transmission mode.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL
signaling) is located.
This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.

This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring
network.
This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output
power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power.
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power
amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power
amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.
This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side.
The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit
to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4,
A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer
that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer
that the BSS does not support the corresponding encryption algorithm.
The eights bits cannot be all zeros and the least significant bit must be 1.
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.
network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is
preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the
BTS and the network layout.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving
an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an
SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For
details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.
dBm).
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by
tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may
drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the
call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful
or if the subscriber hooks on.
This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple
sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of P-
GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this
threshold. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-GSM
frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC
preferentially assigns channels on the R-GSM TRXs if the MS supports P-GSM/E-GSM/R-
GSM parameter
This sub frequency bands and
determines thethe
when cellchannel
is configured with TRXs
is assigned operating
on the QTRU: on the P-
GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM
When the channel issub frequency
assigned bands.
on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing
algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required
power of cell,
If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not
allowed to assign the channel.
The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink
path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.
This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power
sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of
this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is
insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
This parameter specifies the following definitions:

1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled.
The P/N criterion
2. Static determines
power sharing whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is
algorithm.
insufficient. This parameter
3. Dynamic power corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
sharing algorithm.
The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing
algorithm is that the dynamic power sharing algorithm uses the MCPA power sharing
technology, the static power specification is different from dynamic power specification.
When there are several carriers, the maximum output power of single carrier in dynamic
power specification is greater.
In the network swapping, the static/dynamic power on the top of cabinet needs to
If the uplink
compare received
with level difference
the competitor power on ofthe
calls in of
top the same timeslot
cabinet. exceeds
If the static powertheon the top
Threshold
of cabinet of the difference
≥ competitor between
power on theuplink
top ofreceived
cabinet, levels, the power
the static situation must algorithm
sharing be
recorded. During
is used; if the the observation
dynamic power on theof Ptop
seconds, if this
of cabinet ≥ situation
competitorlasts N seconds,
power theof
on the top call
with the≥lowest
cabinet staticuplink
powersignal
on thestrength in the timeslot
top of cabinet, should
the dynamic be handed
power sharingover to another
algorithm is
timeslot.
used.
If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the
Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be
recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call
with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another
timeslot.
The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously
multiplied by 10specifies
This parameter times to the
prevent
QTRUthe floating-point
signal values. that is, the BSC monitors the
merge algorithm,
high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second.
If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal strength of
this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation
must be recorded.
During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover
is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the
calls should be handed over to another timeslot.
P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N specifies the
Duration of uplink received level difference.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels
and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid
subcell and overlaid subcell.
The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the
channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-
rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.
Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available
TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric
The
cell. BSC
Whenassigns channels
the Allow in the overlaid
Rate Selection Basedsubcell to the MS in a concentric
on Overlaid/Underlaid cell.isIfset
Subcell Load theto
channel
Yes, the seizure ratioBusy
TCH Traffic of overlaid
Thresholdsubcell greaterfor
(%) is invalid than
thethe value of cell.
concentric this parameter, half-
rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.
Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available
TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%.
This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate Selection Based on
Overlaid/Underlaid
This Subcell
parameter specifies Load isthe
whether setdynamic
to Yes, the
HSN TCH Traffic Busy
is permitted to Threshold
be used. (%) is
invalid
When thefor frequency
the concentric cell. function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell,
hopping
this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can
be reduced.
Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.
This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO.
In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel
interference among channels occur.
When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell,
the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially.
In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.
This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis
resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate
channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is
preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load.
When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load
Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis
Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is
preferred.
This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the
TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The
parameter
The channelis type
validto
forbeboth built-in
assigned is PCH and according
decided external PCU.
to the channel types that are
allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell.
During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in
the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by
the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs
in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other
cases, the TCHFspecifies
This parameter or TCCH,whether
TCHF Prior
thechannels
TCH/H is are required. assigned on the basis of
preferentially
For channel
the details about cell current
type and load levels, refer
service to the Cell
channel Load
seizure Threshold.
ratio that are allowed by the MSC.
Relevant
During thealgorithm: AMR call channel
channel assignment, assignment
the TCHF or TCCH,algorithms
TCHH Prior channels are required in
the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by
The updating
the MSC, of the
the AMR history
TCH/H record
Prior starts
Allowed is when
set to the
Yes,Update
and the Period of CH Record
percentage of seized times
TCHs
out.
in theUpdate
cell is Freq of CH
greater than Record is subtracted
the value from the
of AMR TCH/H Priorhistory priority
Cell Load of eachIn
Threshold. channel
other to
improve
cases, the the priority
TCHF of theTCHF
or TCCH, channel.
Prior channels are required.
Principles
When the of takingPeriod
Update values ofare
CH as follows:
Record expires, the process of updating the history
Generally,
record set thisoccupancy
of channel parameteristostarted.
2. That is, the history priority of each channel is
If a fixedby
reduced interference
Update Freq.of sourceCHexists
Record orat
anthe
equipment
interval offault
theoccurs,
settingthe update
value of thisfrequency
for the affected
parameter cells can
to increase thebe set to 4priority.
channel or 6.
The Update
Principles Period values
of taking of CH Record
are as is used together with Update Freq of CH Record, In this
follows:
way,
Generally, a high-frequency adjustmentifisthe
the channel can be assigned even channel
used. priority isthe
For example, continuously
update period lowered
should
within
be set a inperiod
such aof time.
way that it ranges from half an hour to one hour because several busy
hours are the major concerns during the actual operation in a day. If the parameter is
set to a too small value, the result of the history record is meaningless. If the parameter
is setparameter
This to a too great value,
specifies the
the result cannot
number be seen inreports
of measurement time during busy
that are hours.
used to
If a fixed interference
determine sourceon
the signal quality exists or anchannels.
signaling equipment fault occurs, the update period for
the affected
The cells can
signal quality be set in channels
on signaling such a way that it
should ranges
not from several
be determined hours
based on to one
only day.
one
This parameter
measurement is used
result. To together
eliminatewiththe Update
influence Freq. of CH Record
of accidental so that
factors, youtheneedchannel
to obtain
can be assigned
the average value even if the quality
of signal history inrecord priority
several decreases.
successive measurement reports of
signaling channels, and then determine the signal quality on signaling channels.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
signal strength on the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate
the signal quality on speech/data TCHs.
The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement
result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average
value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then
determine the signal quality on speech/data TCHs.
speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink
interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower
the signal quality is.
If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level
This parameter
Threshold and the specifies
qualityone of the
grade thresholds
of the to determine
uplink channel whether
is greater the downlink
or equal to the value
interference is existed.
Interf of DL Qual Threshold. The downlink interference occurs.
The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower
the signal quality is.
If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level
Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value
This
Interfparameter
of DL Qualspecifies oneThe
Threshold. of the thresholds
downlink to determine
interference whether the uplink
occurs.
interference
The value rangeis existed.
of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the
quality is.
If the
This uplink channel
parameter level
specifies oneis greater than or equal
of the thresholds to the value
to determine of Interf
whether theofuplink
UL level
Threshold
interferenceand is the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value
existed.
Interf of UL the
The higher Qual Threshold.
level, The uplink
the greater interference
the signal occurs.the value, the lower the
is. The greater
quality is.
If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level
Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value
Interf of UL Qual Threshold.this indicates the signal is good, but the quality is poor, that
This parameter
is, the specifies whether
uplink interference occurs. the history record priority is considered in channel
assignment.
The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is
set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective.
Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record
priority preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel
assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set
to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective.
Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority
This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel
preferentially.
assignment.
If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed
and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel
interference measurement is performed.
If this parameter is set to YES, the channel with little interference is selected
preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel
assignment.
By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference.
In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches
or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the full-
rate TCH is assigned preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm, and
thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm.
Yes: Open
No: Close
This
This parameter
parameter specifies whether
sets the priority ofthe current
different cell supports
types the
in channel dynamic These
allocation. transmission
types
diversity or dynamic PBT:
include:
0: not supported
Capacity with a higher priority
1: dynamic
Quality withtransmission diversity supported
a higher priority
2: dynamic
PS PBT supported
coordination with a relatively higher priority
PS coordination with an absolutely higher priority
The priority of different types is as follows:
Priority by capacity: capacity factors > quality factors > PS cooperation factors >
management factors
Priority
This by quality:
parameter quality
specifies factors the
whether > capacity
combinationfactors
of > PShalf-rate
two cooperation
TCHsfactors > full-
into one
management factorsin a cell.
rate TCH is allowed
IfRelative priority by
this parameter PS to
is set domain:
No, thecapacity factors > and
forced handover PS cooperation factorsby
call delay caused > timeslot
quality
factors
arrangement> management factorsbut there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because
can be avoided,
Absolute
the priority
timeslot by PS domain:
arrangement PS cooperation factors > capacity factors > quality
is unavailable.
factors
This
If this > management
parameter
parameter is set factors
specifies tothe minimum
Yes, calls maytime
failfor thethe
when recovery
timeslotof a TCH from anfails
arrangement SDCCH.
and
The
when processing
the MS doesfor not
the select
SDCCHthe recovered
TCHF in to thethe TCH is ascell.
concentric follows: each cell is configured
with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to
ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle
SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle
SDCCH Threshold N1, the counter increases by 12 within the setting value; if the
number of idle SDCCHs = 8 + N1, the counter remains unchanged. If the value of the
counter
When the is BSC
equal to or lowerwhether
determines than 0 after adjustment,
to initiate the SDCCH
the conversion fromis the
converted
TCH to to
thethe TCH.
SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion
exceeds the Cell
If the number SDCCH
of idle Channel
SDCCHs Maximum.
in the If the than
cell is smaller number of SDCCHs
or equal to the exceeds
value of the
thisvalue
of this parameter,
parameter, the BSCthe BSC
tries todoes not
find a initiate
TCHF thatthe
canconversion.
be converted to the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH.
Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from
TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows:
1.The cell allows the SDCCH dynamic adjustment.
2.(Number of idle TCHFs + number of idle TCHHs/2) ≥ 4 or the number of TRXs in the
cell, and the cell must have at least one idle TCHF.
3.The sum of the
This parameter numberthe
specifies of SDCCHs in the
coding rate cell plus
adopted oneight is smaller
a half-rate thanwhen
channel the maximum
a call is
number of SDCCHs allowed in the cell.
initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have
four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in
the ACS
Based onrespectively.
the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
adjustment
Based on the threshold and
RQI in the anmeasurement
call adjustment hysteresis between
report, the BTS andthe
MSneighboring coding
automatically adjust
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
Based on thethreshold and
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
rates.
This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a
set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech
coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is
1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the
coding rate. The value of this parameter has five bits.
This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is
initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have
four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in
the
BasedACS onrespectively.
the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
adjustment
rates.
rates.
This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a
set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech
coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is
1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the
coding rate. The value of this parameter has eight bits.
This parameter
In normal specifies
assignment the maximum
procedure, number of
after receiving reassignments
the after the
assignment failure assignment
message from
on the Um interface fails.
the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately.
Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um
interface. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased.
Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency
band or of different frequency bands.
If this parameter is set to Same Band, the frequency band of the preferentially
reassigned channel is the same as what is used before the reassignment.
If the parameter is set to Different Band, the frequency band of the preferentially
reassigned channel is different from what is used before the reassignment.
This
You parameter
can set thisspecifies
parameterwhether to disable
to improve the sending of
the deterioration of point-to-point
QoS caused by short
the
messages.
interference,In carrier
specificchannel
cells, sending
fault, orpoint-to-point short messages on the downlink is
engineering fault.
disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls.
The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time
to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the
network.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH
function.
This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an
MS when the Abis resources are insufficient.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the
MS if the Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) or
than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%).
This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and
preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as
queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when
network resources are occupied.
If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest
priority performs handover, and the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after
handover. If the Allow EMLPP is set to No, a certain MS with lower priority releases the
channel, the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after release.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function.

This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell
is valid.
The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement
report is greater than the value of this parameter.
After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell.
... the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement
Add
6: 36 dBand then sequence the TDD cells.
report,
7:
0: ∞
0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the
best cell list or in the measurement report.
A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD
cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell.
0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable)
1:
This-28 dB
parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD
2: -24
cell dB
is valid.
...
If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of
15:
this 28 dB
parameter, the measurement report is valid.
After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell priority
sequence.
0: 0 dB
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell.
1: 6 dB
When
... the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the value of this
parameter
6: 36 dB be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report.
0:
7: 0∞ dB
1: 6 parameter
This dB specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a
DCS1800 cell is valid.
...
If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the
7:
value42 dB
of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report
is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority sequence.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
This
... parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell.
When
6: 36 dB sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band, the value
of
7: this
∞ parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report.
0: 0 dB
This
1: 6 parameter
dB specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900
cell
... is valid.
When
7: 42 dB the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than
the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement
report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority rank.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
This
This parameter
... parameter specifies
specifies the
the signal level offset
level threshold forof a GSM900
cell cell.
reselection in connection mode.
When the priority
6: connection
In 36 dB of aif GSM900
mode, cell
the signal is sequenced
level on the
in the serving cellbasis of its
is below [0,frequency band,
7] or above the
[8, 15],
value
7: ∞ of this parameter should
the MS starts to search for 3G cells. be added to the receive level in the measurement report.
0:
For0example:
dB
If1:this
6 dB
parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the
MS... starts to search for 3G cells.
7: 42 dB
If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10,
the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm ...
14: -54 dBm
15: ∞ (never)
This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this
parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV
value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm
to -37 dBm.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 0 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -110 dBm
to -47 dBm.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is Automatic, the MS chooses the least SCALE
while ensuring that the MS can report the most strong level.
This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with
an invalid BSIC.
This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet
transfer mode.
In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8,
15],
This the MS starts
parameter to search
specifies for 3Gthe
whether cells.
MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the
For
BSICexample:
must be decoded.
If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the
MS starts to search for 3G cells.
If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10,
the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
This
0: -98 parameter
dBm specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection.
Only
1: -94when
dBm the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G cell can be
one
... candidate cell for cell reselection.
0:-74
6: -20dBm
dB
1:
7: -6 dB
(always)
2:
8: -18
-78 dB
dBm
3:
9: -8
-74dBdBm
4:
... -16 dB
5:
14:-10-54dB
dBm
6:
15:-14 dB
∞ (never)
7:
This-12 dB.
parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the
Default
best cellvalue:
list or -20 dB.measurement report.
in the
This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell.
Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the
serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell.
0: -∞parameter
This (always select a cellthe
specifies if acceptable)
level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode.
1: -28 dB
In idle mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS
2: -24 to
starts dBsearch for 3G cells.
… example:
For
15: 28parameter
If this dB is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the
MS starts to search for 3G cells.
This
If this parameter is set tothe
parameter specifies threshold
10 and if the of the signal
signal level oflevel
the for cell reselection
serving in than 10,
cell is higher
connection mode before Qsearch
the MS starts to search for 3G cells. C is obtained.
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
2: -90 dBm
3: -86 dBm
4: -82system
If the dBm information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of neighbor cells
5: -78
on dBm frequency bands.
different
6:
When-74 the
dBmMS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the
7：(always),
serving cell, athat is, the MS
maximum keeps
of the searching
value for 3G
of Serving cells
Band Reporting can be reported.
8: -78 dBm
These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements:
9: -74 dBm
1. The receive levels of the neighbor cells must be higher than 900 Reporting Threshold
10: -70 dBm
or 1800 Reporting Threshold.
11:The
2. -66BSIC
dBmof a neighbor cell must be valid.
12:
3. -62signals
The dBm of the neighbor cells must be the strongest among all the neighbor cells
When
13: -58Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS
dBm frequency
on the
maximum sametransmit power band.
level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if
14: -54 dBm
the class 3 MS on the DCS1800
15：∞(never), that is, the MS does band notdoes not for
search receive the original power command after
3G cells
random access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This
parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the
DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.
This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands.
It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter.
The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early
classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate
assignment, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as
possible. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each
band of multi-band
This parameter MSs. In
specifies the an
when inter-band handover,
MS disconnects power
a call class
if the MS must be correctly
unsuccessfully
described. When paging is made or the BA2 table is sent between
decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 different bands,
andthe
CM3
05.08. message must be known. For dual-band MSs, if ECSC is set to No, the MSC sends a
CLASSMARK
Once a dedicated REQUEST message
channel after the
is assigned MS MS,
to the reports an EST IND
the counter S is message.
enabled andThethe
MSinitial
then
reports
value is the
set CLASSMARK UPDATE
to this parameter message. The connection time of the MS is affected.
value.
Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time
an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter
S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice
or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved
This parameter
through specifies
power control or whether
channel to allow emergency
handover, calls. For
the connection is toMSs whose access class
be re-established or
is from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed.
released.
For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when
the
Thisaccess control
parameter bit is set
specifies to 0 and
whether Emergent
to allow Callof
the MSs Disable
specialisaccess
set to Yes.
classes to access
the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not
allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.
For example,
This parameter 000001 indicates
specifies whetherthat
to users
allow of
theallMSs
classes except access
of common class 10classes
are allowed to
to access
access the network.
the network. In the cell
This parameter is where theload
used for traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur
control.
in busy1 hours.
Value Forthat
indicates example,
accessmore RACH
is not burstValue
allowed. occurs, the AGCH
0 indicates flow
that is overloaded,
access or
is allowed.For
the Abis interface
example, 0000000001flow is overloaded.If
indicates this
that the parameter
MSs is setexcept
of all classes to 1 forclass
the MSs
0 areofallowed
some to
classes,
access thethenetwork.
traffic volume in this cell may be reduced.
During the BTS installation, activation, or cell maintenance test, this parameter can be
set to 1. All MSs are not allowed to access the network, thus reducing the impact on
installation or maintenance.
This parameter
In the cell wherespecifies thevolume
the traffic maximum number
is heavy, of Channel
congestion Request
may messages
occur in thatFor
busy hours. can
be sent bymore
example, an MS in anburst
RACH immediate
occurs,assignment
the AGCH isprocedure.
overloaded, or the Abis interface is
After the MS initiates
overloaded.If the immediate
this parameter is set toassignment procedure,
1 for the MSs it alwaysthe
of some classes, listens tovolume
traffic the in
messages on be
this cell may thereduced.
BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH
group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment
messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel
Request messages at a specified interval.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate
assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment
message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not
exceeded.
Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is
dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or
retransmitted.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment
retransmission parameter to the BTS.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a full-
rate channel).
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the
T200 SDCCH is
Error control (5performed
ms) parameter.
on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a half-
rate channel).
T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH.
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multi-
frame release.
parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3
services.
For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of
the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the
SDCCH.
For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of
the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um
interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer
T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)
parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message
services.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um
interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer
T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)
parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message
services.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over
the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This
This parameter
parameter specifies
specifies the
the expiry
expiry value
value of
of timer
timer T200
T200 used
used for
for the
the FACCH/TCHF over
SDCCH over the Um
the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
interface.
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link
layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error
data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement
retransmission mechanism.
Each message must be confirmed by the peer end.In unknown cases, both ends are
For the BTS3X
waiting in 03.0529
if a message orAt
is lost. later
thisand thethe
time, double-transceiver BTSs, this
deadlock of the system parameter
occurs.Therefore,
specifies the end
the transmit levelmust
threshold for the
establish random
a timer. Whenaccess of theexpires,
the timer MS. If the
thereceive
transmitlevel
endof the
RACH
regardsburst
thatisthe
smaller
receive than
endthe value
does notofreceive
RACH Min.Access
the message Level, the BTS
and then the regards
transmitthis
end
access as anthe
retransmits invalid one and no
message.The decoding
number is performed. Ifisthe
of retransmissions receive level
determined of the RACH
by N200.T200
burst is greater
and the N200 ensurethan thethatvalue of RACH
the data Min. Access
link layer Level,transmits
sequentially the BTS considers
data and that an the
access request
transmission exists
is free on this
from timeslot, and determines together with the value of
errors.
Random Access Error Threshold whether the RACH access is valid.
Generally, RACH Busy Threshold is higher than RACH Min.Access Level. Therefore, for
the
ThisBTS24,
parameterRACH Min.Access
specifies Level is shielded.
the correlation between Fortraining
the BTS2X (excluding the BTS24), the
sequences.
RACH Min.Access
According the GSM Level parameter
protocols, is invalid.
the system determines whether the received signal is the
random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41
bits) and calculates the TA value.
This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control:
TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled.
Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden
This
afterparameter specifies
the faulty TRX the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this
is restored.
parameter has six bits.
Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is
The six bitsimmediately
performed (from the most significant
after the faultybit
TRXto is
the least significant bit) indicate the
restored.
following
Allowed &speech
Recover versions respectively:
When Check Res: The TRX aiding is enabled and the switchback is
half-rate version performed
not immediately 3, half-rateafter
version
the2, half-rate
faulty TRX isversion 1, full-rate
restored. Instead,version 3, full-rate
the switchback is
version
performed 2, and full-rate
during version 1.
the resource Here,
check inversions
the early3,morning,
2, and 1usually
indicate2 AMR, EFR, and FR
o'clock.
respectively.
If a bit is 1, you can infer that the BSC supports the corresponding speech version. If a
bit is 0, you can infer that the BSC does not support the corresponding speech version.
For example, if the parameter is set to 001011, you can infer that full-rate versions 1-2
and half-rate version 1 are supported.
In the
This HDLC networking
parameter specifies mode, if only
the value full-rate
of Radio Linkversion
Timeout1 among the threeAMR
under half-rate full-rate
calls. For
versions
details, seeis selected,
Radio Link it is recommended
Timeout (SACCH that the AEC delay of all the DSPs in the DPUX
period(480ms)).
and DPUC be set to 141 so that the downlink traffic flow is further decreased.
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For
details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls.
For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.
This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls.
For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.
This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry.
When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller
than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate
target cells.
When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is
For theifBTS3X
started series and
the following twodouble-transceiver
conditions are met:BTSs, this supports
The cell parameter specifies
directed try.the
The level
load
threshold
of the cell for the MS than
is greater random access
or equal towhen the BTS
Cell Direct Trydetermines the RACH busy state.
Forbidden Threshold.
When the receive
This parameter level ofthe
specifies thetotal
randomnumberaccess burst timeslot
of paging times. The is greater
parameterthanandthis the
threshold,
paging times theconfigured
BTS considers on thethatMSCtheside
timeslot is busy.
together For thethe
determine BTS3X series
number ofand the
double-transceiver
retransmissions of the BTSs, this parameter
paging message. The onlytotal
indicates
paging whether
times is the timeslot is busy.
approximately equalThe
threshold setting does
to this parameter not affect
multiplied by the thepaging
normal access
times of the MS.
configured on the MSC side. At present,
For
the the BTS2X
Paging series
Times is set(excluding
to 4 in the the BTS24),
MSC. this parameter
The BSC does not supportspecifiesthethe level threshold
mechanism for
for the BTSthe
resending to determine
paging message; an MS random
therefore, access.When
it processesthe receivemessage
a paging level of the
each random
time it
access
receivesburst timeslotmessage.
the paging is greaterThe than this threshold
BTS2X, BTS3X, and anddouble-transceiver
the access demodulation BTS support is
successful, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy and determines whether the
paging retransmission.
RACH access is valid based on the parameter Random Access Error Threshold. For the
BTS2X, the parameter
This parameter is usedRACH by theBusy BTS Threshold
to inform the is used
BSC to of determine whether the
radio link connection timeslot
failure.
is busy.
When In BTS
the addition,
receives the theparameter
SACCH affects the normal
measurement reportaccess
from ofthetheMS,MS.
the The MS access
counter for
is allowed only
determining when the
whether levellink
a radio of the MS random
is faulty is set toaccess
the valueburstofisthis
greater than the
parameter. RACH
Each time
Busy
the BTSThreshold.
fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter
For the BTS24, this parameter has two functions. One function
decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the is indicating the level
threshold of the MS
counter increases byrandom
2. access for the system to determine the RACH busy state.
When
When thethe receive
value oflevel of the random
the counter is 0, theaccess burst
radio link timeslot
fails.The is greater
BTS sends athan this
connection
threshold, the BTS
failure indication considers
message to that the timeslot
the BSC.The numberis busy. The other
of SACCH function is
multi-frames indicating
and the radio
whether
This the
parameter MS access
specifies is allowed.The
the length of MS
timer access
T3150. is allowed
For
link failure counter in the system message specify the radio link failure time on only
details, when
see GSM access
Rec. level
08.58
the and
(including
04.08.
uplink andrandom
that on access
the and handover
downlink access)
respectively. The isjudgment
greater than the threshold.
standard is retransmissions.
whether the
This
The parameter
value of this specifies
parameter the maximum
ranges number
from 0to of
to 63 MS, Physical
(corresponding information
to -110 dBm T3105.If
to -47
When
SACCH
Assume the BTS
message
that sends
the is physical
correctly
maximum information
decoded.
number is Ny1. Ifthe the numberthe BTS starts the timer
of retransmissions exceeds
dBm).
the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends
Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the
physical
BSC information
a connection to MS
failure and restarts
message, which thecantimer
alsoT3105. The maximum
be a handover failure times
message. for After
resending
receiving thephysical
message, information
the BSCisreleases
Ny1. the newly assigned dedicated channel and
stops the timer T3105.
During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the
BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS
sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends
the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts.
The Physical information containing information about different physical layers
guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the
SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS.
This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover
are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is
triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover
are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is
triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed
parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an
adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a
period of time. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold,
and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than
or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.
This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a

3G cell.
During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss
between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value
of this parameter.
The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB.
This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the
original serving cell after a successful fast handover.
This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original
serving cell after a successful fast handover.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the
BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of received measurement
reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, no filtering is performed
and no fast handover decision is made.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the
BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. This helps to
avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the
BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. This helps to
avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.
The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions
of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period during which the
triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a period is within the value defined
by this parameter.
The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions
of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the triggering conditions
of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter,
a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this
parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is
smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller
than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if
the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload
Threshold, a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband

handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding
handover decision is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband

handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding
handover decision is triggered.
After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover
can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.
This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the
UL subcell.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the
OL subcell to the UL subcell.
In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL
Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the
same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may
occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load
handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the UL subcell by level.
This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.
This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL
subcell is enabled.
If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload
threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the
value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO
period.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL
subcell to the OL subcell.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the
UL subcell to the OL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general
overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and
the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target
cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm,
theprevent
To calls in the cell arehandovers,
ping-pong handed over toparameter
this the OL subcell by be
should level.
decided before the handover
This the
from parameter specifies
OL subcell to thethe
UL period
subcell.ofSuppose
load handover for each
the signal level.
strength of serving cell is SS(s)
and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition for a
This parameter
handover is aOL
from the relative value,
subcell which
to the specifies
UL subcell the
is as size of SS(s)
follows: blank- zone
SS(n)between the UL
< Distance
subcell
betweenand the OL subcell.
Boundaries The OL
of UL And greater the -value
Subcells of this
Distance parameter
Hysterisis is, the Boudaries
Between larger the of
blank
UL And zone is.
OL Subcells.
For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL
subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of
serving cell and that of the adjacent cell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is
SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). When SS(s) = SS(n), the
system considers that it is the boundary point of the UL subcell. When SS(s) - SS(n) >
Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells, it is the coverage area of the OL
subcell.
If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter,
the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell
load is not allowed.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter,
the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the
value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell
load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover.
some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that
sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL
subcell.
This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially
processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower
Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower
Load Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL
subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially
processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general
overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell
general overload threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to
the OL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the
value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell.
Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is
preferentially assigned to the UL subcell.
This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered.
If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a
3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater
than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.
The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB.
If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a
3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater
than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.The value of this
parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold,

and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than
or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a

3G cell.
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell
to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell
to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is
used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to
70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is
used in concentric cell handover decision.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality
level 0-7) x 10.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL
subcell to the UL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General
OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time
and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the
target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover
algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level.
This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.
the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the
value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell
load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to
the OL subcell.
some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter,
some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell.
When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell,
the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry
Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL
subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.
Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed.
After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the
OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail.
After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the
UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.
If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL
subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO
to avoid ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the
During
UL subcellthe handover.
handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically
handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed
over to the OL subcell first.
The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step
Period.
This parameter, together with Underlay HO Step Period, controls the level strip of the
When
handover multiple
from requests for thetoUL-to-OL
the UL subcell handover
the OL subcell. are sent
In other simultaneously,
words, the time taken calls
in with
This
lower parameter
level may
subtracting determines
be handed
Underlay HO Step whether
over the
first.from
Level traffic
This does
the load in the
not conform
handover ULto
strip issubcell determines
the principle
Underlay that the
HO Step UL
call
Period.
subcell to OL
of the best subcell
quality handover
should or the over
be handed OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced
preferentially.
concentric
Therefore, the cell.hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with
When
higherthis parameter
RX level from the is set
UL to Yes, to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the
subcell
If thetaken
time call isininsubtracting
the OL subcell and ifHO
Underlay theStep
OL to UL HO
Level Allowed
from parameter
the signal level ofisthe
sethandover
to Yes,
the OL subcell to UL subcell handover is triggered when the traffic load in the UL subcell
strip.
is lower than En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold.
If the call is in the UL subcell and the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is triggered,
and if the UL to OL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, a timer is started when the
traffic load in the UL subcell is greater than En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold,
thus handing over
This parameter the of
is one MSs theinparameters
the UL subcell thattodetermine
the OL subcell. If the traffic
the coverage of theload
OL in the UL
subcell
subcell is lowerof
and UL subcell than En Iuo Outconcentric
an enhanced Cell General OverLoad Threshold, the related timer is
cell.
stopped,
If and theConcentric
the Enhanced MSs in theAllowed
UL subcell are not handed
parameter is set to over
Yes, to
thethe OL subcell.
coverage of the OL
When this
subcell andparameter
UL subcell is is set to No, thebytraffic
determined UtoOload in the UL Level
HO Received subcell is not taken
Threshold, OtoUinto
HO
account
Receivedfor triggering
Level Threshold,the UL subcell Threshold,
RX_QUAL to OL subcell TA handover
Threshold,orandtheTAOLHysteresis.
subcell to UL
subcell handover
The parameter
level valuesis0in an enhanced
through concentric cell. to -47 dBm.
This one of the63 map to -110
parameters dBm
that determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO
Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.
The
In level values
a concentric 0 through
cell, the channel63 map to -110 dBm
assignment for an to incoming-BSC
-47 dBm. handover can be
processed in one of the following modes:
Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.
In a concentric
Underlaid cell,Aan
Subcell: intra-BSC
channel incoming
in the cell is
UL subcell handover request
preferentially can be processed in
assigned.
one of the following
No Preference: modes:
A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment
System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to
algorithms.
the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the
measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer.
During the comparison and determination, the BSC does not take the RX_LEV Hysteresis
into consideration.
Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.
Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.
IfNo
TAPreference:
Pref. of Imme-Assign
A channel Allowed is set
is assigned to Yes and
according the access_delay
to general in the channel
channel assignment
request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL
algorithms.
subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a
channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.
This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in
the channel request message during an immediate assignment.
If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is
preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment.
IfIfthe Assign
TA Pref. of Optimum
Imme-Assign Layer parameter
Allowed is setistoset toand
Yes System Optimization,in
the access_delay the
thecurrent
channel
receive
request level on the
message SDCCH
is lower canTA
than beThreshold
estimatedof(by interpolating
Imme-Assign andafiltering)
Pref., channelbased
in the on
OL
the uplink
subcell measurementassigned
is preferentially value in during
the measurement
the immediate reports sent on the
assignment. SDCCH. aThen,
Otherwise,
the BSC in
channel determines whether
the UL subcell a TCH in the assigned.
is preferentially UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be
assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-
If the Assign Optimum
optimum-level Threshold,Layer
andparameter
the result is
ofset to System
comparing theOptimization, the current
TA and TA Threshold of
receive
Assignment levelPref..
on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on
the
Onlyuplink
whenmeasurement
the receive level value
on in the
the measurement
SDCCH is greaterreports
than orsent
equalonto
the SDCCH. Then,
Assign-optimum-
the
levelBSC determines
Threshold and thewhether
TA is alower
TCH than
in theTAULThreshold
subcell orofinAssignment
the OL subcell should
Pref., a TCHbein the
assigned
OL subcellbased on the result
is preferentially of comparing
assigned the uplink
to the MS. receive
Otherwise, level
a TCH inon
thethe
ULSDCCH
subcelland
is
Assign-optimum-level
preferentially assignedThreshold,
to ensure and the result
successful of comparing the TA and TA Threshold
assignment.
of Assignment Pref..
Only when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to Assign-
In a concentric Threshold
optimum-level cell, the TCHandcan thebeTAassigned in theTA
is lower than following
Thresholdmodes:
of Assignment Pref., a
System
TCH in the Optimization:
OL subcell is Based on the measurement
preferentially assigned to the reports
MS. sent on the aSDCCH,
Otherwise, TCH in the
the BSC
UL
determines which service
subcell is preferentially layer should
assigned be preferentially
to ensure selected.
successful assignment.
Underlaid Subcell:
The level values The TCH63
0 through in the
mapULtosubcell
-110 dBm are topreferentially
-47 dBm. assigned to an MS.
Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS.
No preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment
algorithms.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV
Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, UtoO HO Received Level
Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.
#N/A
One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL
subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed
parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by
RX_QUAL Threshold,
This parameter is oneUtoO HOparameters
of the Received Level Threshold,the
that determine OtoU HO Received
coverage of the Level
OL subcell
Threshold, TA Threshold,
and UL subcell. and TA Hysteresis.
When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Threshold,
This TA Threshold,
parameter andparameters
is one of the TA Hysteresis.thatIfdetermine
the Enhanced Concentric
the coverage of Allowed
the OL subcell
parameter
and UL is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid.
subcell.
UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion
When the Enhanced
Loss Difference + Path Concentric Allowedofparameter
Loss Difference is set to No,
Different Antennas the coverage
+ Pass of the OL
Loss Difference of
subcell
Differentand UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Frequencies.
Threshold,
Measure the TAreceive
Threshold,
leveland TA UL
of the Hysteresis. If the
subcell and OLEnhanced
subcell at Concentric Allowed
several different places if
parameter is set
the UL subcell and to OL
Yes, this parameter
subcell is invalid.
use different antennas. The recommended number of
The RX_LEV
places is five. Threshold parameter refers to the threshold of the downlink receive level.
The OL subcell and the UL subcell have different transmit power. Therefore, the receive
level of the MS in the UL subcell is different from that in the OL subcell. This parameter
specifies the power that should be compensated for the OL subcell. The value of this
parameter should be the sum of these items: UO Amplifier Power Difference, Combiner
Insertion Loss Difference, Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas, and Pass Loss
Difference of Different Frequencies.
Thisparameter
This value is measured
specifiesat the site.the
whether Multiple-point
TA is used as measurements shouldfor
a decisive condition be the
performed
when different
concentric antennas are used for the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced
cell handover.
Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. In other words, the
power of the OL subcell is not compensated.
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive
condition for the concentric cell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive
condition for the concentric cell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is
enabled.
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is
enabled.
This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an
intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher
than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.
This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To
trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive
quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.
This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking.

To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from
the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink
receive level based
This parameter on the
specifies K principle.
the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS
is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after
HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei
II power control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the
new channel after handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding call
drops caused by too low a uplink receive level.
dBm).
This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells
of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the
Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.
If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where
the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is
located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or
Pico layer, penalty is performed.
This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO.
The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter
are regarded as consecutive handovers.
When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a
timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover.
Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires.
This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers

allowed.
If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified
threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple
consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period.
The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The
threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this
threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving
slow.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the
BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter
corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the
BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter
corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level
for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The
handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the
range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO
Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell.
When the load
The value of the
of Load HOcell is equal
Step to or greater
Level must than
be smaller thethat
than LoadofHO
theThreshold, all the calls
Load HO Bandwidth.
served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU
will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to
traffic congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load
handover is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by
levels.
Thissetting
The parameter specifies
of this the period
parameter for each
is dependent onload
the handover
Edge HO DLlevel.
RX_LEV Threshold
parameter.
Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load
handover is allowed.
If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs
System
handed flux
overthresholds
from othercorrespond to the the
cells. Otherwise, system flux obtained
cell rejects the MSs based on message
handed over from
packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control
other cells.
level of the system.
0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11
When Load
indicates theHO Allowed
highest is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85.
level.
The traffic
A load load ofisaallowed
handover cell refers
onlytowhen
the TCH
the seizure
system rate
flux in the cell.
is lower than the value of this
The load handover
parameter. is triggered
The handover whenover
performed the traffic load in athreshold
the maximum cell is greater
may than
have the value of
this parameter.
tremendous In other
impacts words,
on the the load
system. handover
Thus, is triggered
this parameter when
should notthe ratio
be set toofa TCHs
higher
occupied
value. in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load
1) The flow handover.
control level algorithm for the
assigned system messages: [(Average Message Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard
Begin Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold - Inner Flow Control Discard
Begin Threshold) x 100]/10+1 (round-down for division operation). If the value is smaller
than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, Level 0 is used. If the value is equal to
or greater than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the level is calculated. The
value range is from 0 to 11.
2)
The Flow control
value threshold
of this parameter for corresponds
the CPU to start to discard quality
to multiplying the channel
level access messages
0 to 7 by 10. An
and paging handover
emergency messages:can 80% be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
. Flow control
greater threshold
than the value offor theparameter.
this CPU to discard all channel access messages and paging
messages: 100%
. CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to or greater
than CPU flow control threshold 80% corresponds to level 2. An increase of 5% means
The value ofof
an increase this parameter
2 levels. Levelcorresponds to multiplying
10 is the highest. The levelquality
value level
can be0 to
0, 7
2,by
4, 10.
6, 8,An
and
emergency
10. handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS
is greater than the value of this parameter.

emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is

emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS
is greater than the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR
service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining
whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the
receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold.
For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference
handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter
is set to a small value.
When n = 1, that is, when the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal
If
tothe
30,receive level of the
this parameter serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or
is invalid.
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or
If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality
of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter,
uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or
If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement
report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision
related to no downlink measurement report is allowed.
If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive
quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink
measurement report emergency handover is triggered.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially
selected. An intra-cell
This parameter is usedhandover,
to controlhowever, is triggered
the no downlink if no candidate
measurement reportcell is available
handover
and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
algorithm.
If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is
disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is
not allowed in this cell.
If this
This parameter
parameter is is set for
used to 1, the no downlink
configuring the filter measurement
for the rapidly report
droppedhandover
receivealgorithm
level. is
enabled.
Together
This Therefore,
with filter
parameter is usedhandover
parameter decision
B, it is one
for configuring related
the of thetofor
filter nothe
nine downlink
filter measurement
parameters.
rapidly dropped The receivereport
level.is
allowed in this formula
corresponding
This parameter cell.
indicateisspecifies
as follows the(indrop
the trend
program,of thethereceive
value of A1 within
level to A8 can be
a period.
obtained by subtracting
If this parameter is set to10 a from
higher the configured
value, a morevalue, and Bdrop
rapid level is theis negative
required forvalue of the
configured
triggering avalue):
rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter
C1(nt)
Parameters
This = A1 A1
parameter x C(nt)
to
is A8. + A2
used forx configuring
C(nt-t) + A3the x C(nt-2t)
filter for+…+ A8 x C(nt-7t).
the rapidly droppedWhere,receive C(nt)
level.is the
uplink
For RX_Level
details, refer of
to the serving
Filter Parameterscell in the
A1-A8.MR received
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is
smaller than B,formula
corresponding and if C(nt) is asisfollows
below (inthethe Edge HO RX_LEV
program, Thrsh.,
the value of then
A1 tothe A8 signal
can belevel is
considered
obtained byto be rapid dropping.
subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
Filter parameters
configured value):A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8
correspond
C1(nt) = A1 to a1 to +
x C(nt) a8A2 in xthe program,
C(nt-t) + A3theand ai = Ai-10
x C(nt-2t) +…+ (i A8
= 1-8). Therefore,
x C(nt-7t). Where, among
C(nt) a1
is to
the
Thisinparameter
a8 the program, is used
there for configuring
must be values filter for
smaller theor
than rapidly
equal dropped
to 0. receive level.
uplink
Together RX_Level
with of
filter the serving
parameter cell
B, itin
is the
one MR
of received
the nine at
filterthe time
parameters.of nt. If
TheC1(nt) is
For example,
smaller than B,if the
andreceive
if C(nt) level dropstherapidly in aRX_LEV
granularity period, you need tolevel
set A3
corresponding
to A8 to 10,to A1beformula
torapid
0, and asisto
is A2 below
follows
20. In(in this
Edge
the HO
program,
case, C1(nt)the = a1
Thrsh.,
value
x Cof
then
A1+toa2
(nt)
the
A8xsignal
can be = is
C(nt-t)
considered
obtained by subtracting dropping.
10 from the level
configured value, andyou B is the negative value a of the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
Filter parameters To to
A1 trigger
A8 may a rapid
be smaller drop
thanhandover,
or equal to 10.should set C1(nt)
Parameters A1 totoA8
configured
value value):
smaller than B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula
correspond
C1(nt) A1 to
=the a1 to +
C(nt-t) + A3in and
x an ai = Ai-10
C(nt-2t) +…+ (i A8
= 1-8). Therefore,
C(nt) a1
is to
the
reflects
This
a8 inparameter
the rapid
program, is drop
used
there of
forthe
must cell
belevel
configuring values the MR.for
filter
smaller theor
than rapidly
equal dropped
uplink
You can
Together RX_Level
configure of
withiffilter the
the serving
filter
parameter to cell
definein
B,drops the
the
it is one MR
numberreceived
of the of MRsat the
used time
and of
thent. If C1(nt)
extent to is
which
For example,
smaller than the
B,formula
and receive
if C(nt) level
isfollows
below the rapidly
Edge in nine
HO aRX_LEVfilter parameters.
granularity period,
Thrsh., then youTheneed to set A3
the
the
to A8 level
correspondingdrops.
to 10, A1be However,
to 0, and is A2the
as tosetting
20. In(in ofthe
this this parameter
program,
case, C1(nt)the =isa1 complicated.
value
x Cof A1+toa2
(nt) A8xsignal
can belevel
C(nt-t) =
is
considered
obtained byto rapid
subtracting dropping.
10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
A1 trigger
A8 may a rapid level drop
be smaller thanhandover,
or equal to you
10.should set C1(nt)
Parameters A1 totoA8a
configured
value value):
smaller than B.a8and then the fast and levelaidrop appears in a MR period. The formula
correspond
C1(nt) =the to a1
A1 rapid
x C(nt) to + A2 in xthe program,
C(nt-t) + A3in x an =
C(nt-2t) Ai-10
+…+ (i = 1-8). Therefore,
A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, among
C(nt) a1
is to
the
reflects
This
a8 inparameter
the program, is drop
used
there of
forthe
must cell
belevel
filter
smaller theor
than rapidly
equal dropped
uplink
You can
Together RX_Level
configure
with of
filter the
the serving
filter
parameter to cell
define
B, itin
is the
the
one MR
number
of received
the of
nine MRsat
filterthe
used time
and
parameters.of
thent. If C1(nt)
extent
The to is
which
For example,
smaller than if the
B, and receive
if C(nt) level drops
isfollows
below the rapidly
Edge in aRX_LEV
HO granularity period,
Thrsh., then you
the need tolevel
set A3
the
to A8level
correspondingdrops.
formula
to 0, and is A2the
as tosetting
20. In(in ofthe
this this parameter
program,
value
x Cof A1+toa2
(nt) A8xsignal
can be = is
C(nt-t)
considered
obtained to rapid
by subtracting dropping.
10 from the level
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
A1 trigger
A8 may a rapid
be smaller drop
thanhandover,
configured
value value):
correspond
C1(nt) A1 to
=the a1 to +
C(nt-t) + A3in and
x an ai = Ai-10
C(nt-2t) +…+ (i A8
= 1-8). Therefore,
C(nt) a1
is to
the
reflects
This
a8 inparameter
the rapid
program, is drop
used
there of
forthe
must cell
belevel
filter
smaller theor
than rapidly
equal dropped
uplink
You can
Together RX_Level
configure of
withiffilter the
the serving
filter
parameter to cell
definein
B,drops the
the
it is one MR
numberreceived
of the of MRsat the
used time
and of
thent. If C1(nt)
extent to is
which
For example,
smaller than the
B,formula
and receive
if C(nt) level
isfollows
below the rapidly
Edge in nine
HO aRX_LEVfilter parameters.
granularity period,
Thrsh., then youTheneed to set A3
the
theA8
to level
correspondingdrops.
to 0, and is A2the
as tosetting
20. In(in ofthe
this this parameter
program,
value
x Cof A1+toa2
(nt) A8xsignal
can belevel
C(nt-t) =
is
considered
obtained byto rapid
subtracting dropping.
10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
A1 trigger
or equal to you
configured
value value):
smaller than B.a8and then the fast and levelaidrop appears in a MR period. The formula
correspond
C1(nt) =the to a1
A1 rapid
C(nt-2t) Ai-10
C(nt) a1
is to
the
reflects
Thisinparameter
a8 the program, is drop
used
there of
forthe
must cell
belevel
filter
smaller theor
than rapidly
equal dropped
uplink
You can
Together RX_Level
configure
with of
filter the
the serving
filter
parameter to cell
define
B, itin
is the
the
one MR
number
of received
the of
nine MRsat
filterthe
used time
and
parameters.of
thent. If C1(nt)
extent
The to is
which
For example,
smaller than if the
B, and receive
isfollows
below the rapidly
Edge in aRX_LEV
Thrsh., then you
the need tolevel
set A3
the
to A8level
correspondingdrops.
formula
to 0, and is A2the
as tosetting
20. In(in ofthe
this this parameter
program,
value
x Cof A1+toa2
(nt) A8xsignal
can be = is
C(nt-t)
considered
obtained to rapid
10 from the level
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
A1 trigger
A8 may a rapid
be smaller drop
thanhandover,
configured
value smaller value):
than B.a8and then the fast and levelaidrop appears in a MR period. The formula
correspond
C1(nt) =the to a1
A1 rapid
C(nt-2t) Ai-10
C(nt) a1
is to
the
reflects
This
a8 inparameter
the program, is drop
used
there of
forthe
must cell
configuring
be level
values the MR.for
filter
smaller theor
than rapidly
equal dropped
uplink
You can
Together RX_Level
configure
with of the
filter the serving
filter
parameter to cell
define
B, itin
is the
the
one MR
number
of received
the of
nine MRsat the
filterused time
and
parameters.ofthe
nt.extent
If C1(nt)
The to is
which
For example,
smaller than if the
B, and receive
isfollows
below the rapidly
Edge in aRX_LEV
Thrsh., then you
the need tolevel
set A3
theA8
to level
correspondingdrops.
formula
to 0, and is A2the
as tosetting
20. In(in ofthe
this this parameter
program,
value
x Cof A1+toa2
(nt) A8xsignal
can be = is
C(nt-t)
considered
obtained to rapid
10 from the level
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
A1 trigger
A8 may a rapid
be smaller drop
thanhandover,
configured
value value):
correspond
C1(nt) A1 to
=the a1 to +
C(nt-t) + A3in and
x an ai = Ai-10
C(nt-2t) +…+(i A8 = 1-8). Therefore,
C(nt)a1 is to
the
reflects
a8 in the rapid
program, drop
there of must
the cell
belevel
values MR. than
smaller or the
equal to 0.
uplink
You canRX_Level
configure of the
the serving
filter to cell
definein the
the MR
numberreceived
of MRsat used time
and of
thent. If C1(nt)
extent to is
which
For example,
smaller than if the
B, and receive
if C(nt)the level
is belowdropsthe rapidly in aRX_LEV
Edgeparameter
Thrsh., then you
the need
signaltolevel
set A3
is
the
to A8level drops.
to 0, and A2 tosetting
20. In thisof thiscase, C1(nt) =isa1 complicated.
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) =
considered to rapid dropping.
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).
Filter parameters A1 To totrigger
or equal to you
value smaller
correspond to than
a1 toB.a8and then
in the the fast and
program, levelaidrop
= Ai-10appears in a MR
(i = 1-8). period. The
Therefore, formula
among a1 to
reflects
a8 in thethe rapid drop
program, there of must
the cell belevel
values in smaller
an MR. than or equal to 0.
You
This can configure
parameter
For example, the
specifies
if the filter
receive the touplink
level define
drops the
quality number
rapidly in aofgranularity
threshold MRs
of an used and
emergency
period,theyouextent
handover.
needto to
which
An
set A3
theA8
to level
emergency drops.
to 10, A1 to However,
handover 0, anddueA2 the
toto setting
bad
20.quality of this
In this parameter
iscase,
triggered
C1(nt)when=isa1 complicated.
the
x Cuplink
(nt) + receive quality
a2 x C(nt-t) = is
greater than or equal
10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). to the UL
To trigger Qual.level
a rapid Threshold.
drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a
When an emergency
value smaller than B. handover
and then the is triggered,
fast levelan inter-cell
drop appears handover
in a MR should
period. beThe formula
preferentially
reflects the rapid selected.
drop of Antheintra-cell
cell levelhandover,
in an MR. however, is triggered if no candidate cell
is
Youavailable and if intra-cell
can configure the filter handovers
to define the arenumber
allowed. of MRs used and the extent to which
the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is complicated.
This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency
handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is
greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be
preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell
is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of

this parameter.
This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of

measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB
values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be
selected.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after
handover failure due to data configuration.
handover failure due to the Um interface error.
handover failure due to cell congestion.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.
By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus
avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.
By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus
avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR)
handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the
previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-
H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the
TCH REP_QUANT.
By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the
SDCCH REP_QUANT.
By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for
averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the
case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the
case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is
shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.
averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell
after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed.
After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original
serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority
and
This handover
parametertospecifies
the original serving cell
the penalty is not
on the allowed.
signal strength of the original serving cell to
avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance.
This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO.
After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original
and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed.
The parameter
This penalty level values the
specifies 0 through 63ofmap
duration the to -110 dBm
penalty to -47
imposed ondBm.
the original cell where
an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated.
During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the
penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original
This parameter
serving specifies
cell is not the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell
allowed.
where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This
parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty
Time after BQ HO.
After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the
and handover to the serving cell is not allowed.
The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell.
This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time.
The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
timing advance.
The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average
the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover
decision.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in
neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by
Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.
channel quality on the SDCCH.
signal strength on the SDCCH.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and
to ensure correct handover decisions.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during
interpolation.
If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of
this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed
according to two consecutive MRs that are lost.
If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this
parameter, all lost MRs are discarded, and calculations are made again when new MRs
are
Thisreceived.
parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive
level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell
can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map
to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to
the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC.
For example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed
MRs to the BSC every 0.5 second.
This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the
BTS to the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report
to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR
and the original MR to the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter
determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This
parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set
to NO if power control is performed by the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead
of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The
purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality.
This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or
the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad.
If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is
performed on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell.
When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to
occur. If a handover fails, a penalty should be performed on the serving cell. These kinds
of penalties can be performed on cells in one BSC or on external cells.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover.
After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be
handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency
handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval.
When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover
timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the
timer expires.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No
handover is allowed during the minimum interval.
A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only
after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The
parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers.
After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel
only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period
specified by this parameter.
After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel
only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period specified
by this parameter.
This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB
handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL
subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between
the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can
decrease the interference, improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive
frequency reuse of the OL subcell.
0: Close
1: Open
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.
This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled.

0: NO; 1: YES
This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover.
When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH
handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the
configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.
This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover.
When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH
handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the
configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.
The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is,
the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N
consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the
intra-cell full-rate
This parameter to half-rate
determines handover
the are the
period during F2H HO
which the Threshold
triggering or the H2F HO
conditions of the
Threshold.
intra-cell This parameter
full-rate is used
to half-rate with the
handover are two
met.parameters.
The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is,
the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N
consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the
intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO
Threshold. This parameter is used with the two parameters.
This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does
not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover.
The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an
adjacent cell.
Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the
candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset)
TheM
The Mcriterion
criterionsupports
is met if the
the Filtered
minimum uplink
valuelevel of the adjacent
constraint of uplink cell >= (Minimum
receive level of the
uplink power
adjacent cell. of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset);
otherwise, the Mlevel
Expected uplink criterion is adjacent
of the not met. cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min
Access Level Offset)
The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL
Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset); otherwise, the M criterion is not
met.
This
value of this the ranges
parameter hysteresis of0an
from tointer-layer or inter-priority
63 (corresponding to -110handover. This
dBm to -47
parameter
dBm). is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers.
Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold -
Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO
Threshold + Inter-layer HO Hysteresis of an adjacent cell - 64.
This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate
cells for handovers.
This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are
allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent
3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering
conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT
handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.
conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT
handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in
the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical
handover is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in
the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical
handover is triggered.
conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge
handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.
conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge
handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its
corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an
edge handover is triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its
corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an
edge
If the handover
DL receiveislevel
triggered.
remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a
This parameter
period, the edgecorresponds
handover isto P of the P/N
triggered. criterion.
If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant
edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and
the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel
interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and
If
thethe UL receive
actual network level remains lower
performance than the
to achieve theEdge HObalance.
UL/DL UL RX_LEV Threshold for a
period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant
edge handover
The value of thisthreshold can
parameter be decreased.
ranges from 0 toIf63
the PBGT handover
(corresponding tois not dBm
-110 enabled and
to -47
the
dBm).edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel
interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL
RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and
the actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance.
This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled.
dBm).
When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality
is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is
triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over.
This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The
concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the
aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve
system capacity and conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified
into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA
handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA
threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is
triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The
longer the distance is, the greater the TA value is.
This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a
BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER).
When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold.
a BQ emergency handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal
level or channel interference.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS
makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To
avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level
of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive
level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is
handed over to a neighbor cell.
This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are
set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical
handover. Then, based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells
with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority).
This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover
algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search
for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The
cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong
handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the
same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this
function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call
drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS.
This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed
over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro
cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is
recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to
This
reduceparameter
the CPU specifies
load. Thewhether a traffic
fast-moving load-sharingcell
micro-to-macro handover is enabled.
handover algorithm is used
The
only load handover
in special helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel
conditions.
assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network
performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the
TCHs in the cells of the same layer.
The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to
adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a
partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be
adjusted.
This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced
intra-cell handover is not subject to this parameter.
This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.
This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the
sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority.
The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of
cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM
Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.
This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only
before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and
0408.
This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS
where cell reselection parameters can be obtained.
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for
calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this
parameter
This parameteris setspecifies
to 1, thethe
MSmanual
should obtain PI and
correction other parameters for calculating C2
of C2.
from other bytes of the system information
If this parameter is properly configured, the number type 7 orof
8 message.
handovers can be reduced and a
better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for
an MS to access the cell when CRO increases.
This parameter
Generally, the CROCell should
Bar Qualify (CBQ)
be less thanis25
valid
dB only for cell
because selection.large
excessively It is invalid
CRO mayfor bring
cell
reselection.
uncertainties to the network.In addition, the same CRO applies to the cells with the
1:
samebarred
priority.For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.
0:
Thisallowed
parameter affects only GSM Phase II MSs or GSM PhaseII+ MSs.
Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM
Rec. 04.08.
Cell
0 Reselect0 Parameters Indication (PI for short),
Normal Normalsent on the broadcast channel,
indicates
0 whether
1 CRO, Barred
TO, and PT are used. Barred
Actually,
1 the0MS is informed Low whether C2-basedNormal cell reselection is performed. For details,
see
1 GSM Rec. 1 0408 andLow 0508.In addition, Normal
a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based
cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.
When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system
information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2
equals C1, the MS
This parameter determines
is used whether
to determine a cell is
whether reselected
cell based
reselection on the value
is performed of C1.
between
different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the
possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell
This parameter
reselection specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.
hysteresis.
In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period
This parameter
decreases, specifies
the service the numberisofimproved.
performance multi-frames When in the
a cycle on thetraffic
signaling paging of channel,
the
that
network is, the number the
increases, of paging
usage sub-channels
of radio resources on a drops.In
specific paging
addition, channel.
when the location
In actualperiod
update situation, an MS monitors
decreases, the MS power only the associatedincreases,
consumption paging sub-channel.
and the average For details,
see
standbyGSMtimeRec. is05.02
greatlyandshortened.When
05.08. setting this parameter, take into consideration
If the
the value of this
processing parameter
capability of the increases,
MSC and the BSC, number
the load of on
paging
the Asub-channels
interface, Abis in a cell
increases,
interface, Um thusinterface,
reducingHLR, the number
and VLR. ofGenerally,
MSs served by each
a larger paging
value sub-channel
is adopted and
in continuous
prolonging
coverage inthe urbanaverage
areasservice time of value
and a smaller the MS inbattery.
suburbs,For details
rural areas,about the calculation
or blind spots.
of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases,
and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases.
This
Thisparameter
parameterspecifies
should be thesetnumber
on the of timeslots
basis that the between
paging the consecutive
channel is not overloaded. In
transmissions
addition, the value of channel
of the request
parameter messages
should be by asan small
MS. as possible. The load of the
To
paging
This reduce the collisions
channels
parameter should on
specifies bethethe RACH and
periodically
number to improve
of measured
CCCH efficiency
on reserved
blocks the running of the
for network.
the AGCH. RACH,
The antheof
value
After
access
this
CCCH isalgorithm
parameter
configured, is defined
should this in GSM on
beparameter
adjusted Rec.the04.08.
actually basis The
of the
indicates algorithm
load.
the CCCH specifies
usage for three
AGCH and
parameters:
A paging message
PCH. Tx-integer must (Tbe forsent
short), maximum number
simultaneously in all theof cells
retransmissions
in an LAC. Thus,(RET),the and S
related
capacity to channel
of the pagingcombination.
channel in a cell, that is, the number
This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. of paging sub-channels in a
Thismust
cell, parameter
be theworkssame with as orthe configuration
similar to that in of the cells
other CCCHoftoan determine
LAC. the parameter S.
This relations
between thisthe NCCs to be
parameter and reported by the MSsofinthe
the configuration a cell.
CCCH This areparameter
as follows: is
anWheninformation element
this parameter is (IE)
set into the
3, 8,system
14, or information
50, S is 55 iftype 2 and and
the CCCH 6 messages.
SDCCH do not
If a bitainphysical
share the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding
channel.
measurement
When this report
parameter
This parameter specifies toisthetheBTS.
set to 3, The
cell 8, 14,
bar value
or 50,
access of(CBA).
this
S is parameter
41 if the CCCH has a byte
and SDCCH(eightshare
bits).a
Each
Valuebit
physical maps
channel.
0 indicates with an cell
that NCCaccess
(0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit
is allowed.
NWhen
is 0, the
Value this
1 MS doesthat
parameter
indicates notiscell
measure to 4, the
setaccess 9,isorcell
not level
6, allowed.
S is 76 of ifNCC
the N.CCCH and SDCCH do not share a
physical channel.
Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For
When this
details, seeparameter
GSM Rec. 04.08. is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 52 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical
channel.
0When this parameter
0 isNormal
set to 5, 10, or 20, SNormal is 109 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not
share
0 a physical
1 channel. Barred Barred
1When this parameter
0 isLow
set to 5, 10, or 20,Normal S is 58 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a
physical
1 channel.
1 Low Normal
When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 163 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not
share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 86 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a
physical channel.
This
When parameter specifies
this parameter whether
is set to 7, 12,to enable
or 32, Sthe Attach-detach
is 217 if the CCCH allowed
and SDCCH(ATT) do function.
not
For
share different cellschannel.
a physical in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.
IfWhen
this parameter
this parameter is setistoset Yes,to network
7, 12, orconnection
32, S is 115isifnot theprovided
CCCH and after
SDCCHthe MSshareis a
powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources.
physical channel.
The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of {0, 1…,
MAX(T,
If the TC8)-1}.
resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the
The duration
test number of fortimeslots
continuously (excluding the timeslot
transmitting the uplinkuseddatato send messages)
of the old channel. between
If TDMtwo
adjacent
transmission channel
is usedrequest
on the messages
Abis interface,is a random value from
this parameter is the
set tocollection
10 ms; if ofIP{S, S+1,
…, S+T-1}. is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms.
transmission
When T increases, the interval between two adjacent channel requests increases, and
RACH conflicts decrease.
When S increases, the interval between two adjacent channel request messages
increases, and RACH conflicts decrease, thus improving the usage of AGCH and SDCCH.
The access time of the MS, however, is prolonged and the network performance is
decreased when T and S increase. Under normal conditions, an appropriate T value
should be used to ensure that S is as low as possible, and ensure that AGCH and SDCCH
are not overloaded.
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR
encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the
ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109
(AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR
encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the
ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109
(AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the
HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the
HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover
failure message.
This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element
when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS.
After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another
attempt to access the network after the timer expires.
For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR
INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages
are received, and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the
call is. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The
BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires.
This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the
channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to
reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections.
The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS.
the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.
The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC
receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC
deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a
handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the
outgoing BSC handover fails.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a
handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or
inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.
After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer
T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete
message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.
In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the
timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a
handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an
outgoing BSC handover failure message.
In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover
command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a
Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure
message.
The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC
message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases
the seized SDCCH channel.
This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure.
The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC
receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires
before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.
Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable.
Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable.
This
Qtru parameter specifies
Signal Merge Switchwhether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping
supports
The QTRUthe intelligent
signal merge power consumption
algorithm decrease.
is to prevent the calls with great difference between
uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot.
The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5
second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal
strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels,
the situation must be recorded.
During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover
is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the
calls should be handed over to another timeslot.
P specifies
This the Observed
parameter timemaximum
specifies the of uplink received level
number of difference,
paging andthat
messages N specifies
a cell is the
Durationtoofsend
allowed uplink received
within level difference.
a statistical period.
This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed
to send within a statistical period.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell
paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.
This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an
integral multiple of 50 ms.
The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging
message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to
cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.
This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that
is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics
algorithm II, when the frequency scanning function is enabled.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the
cell is out of service.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell
is out of service.
When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if
the cell is out of service.
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS
services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be
preempted.
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS
services.
This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message.
This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel
through assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the
assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers.
Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies.
The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell.
This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency
scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result.
Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and diversity
levels during the scanning of main and diversity antennas
0 specifies optimization.
Maximum/Mean: maximum and mean values of the uplink receive level
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover
timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
contained
0 specifiesin the statistics of call drops.
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell
handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are
not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long
time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover
failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault
are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link
fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by
the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call
reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the
statistics of call drops.
0When
specifies optimization.
the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
1 specifiesin
contained nothe
optimization.
statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except
for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource
unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifiesin
contained optimization.
the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource
unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention
contained
optimization.
In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in
the statistics of call drops.
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM
response are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
contained
optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are
When
This the call drop
parameter counters
specifies are not
whether theoptimized,
repeater isthe call drops
configured in caused by this
a cell. The reason
function of are
contained
repeater isinsimpler
the statistics of call
than that drops.
of BTS, and the repeater is an extended equipment that is
used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only
the repeater can improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic
volume of network.
The setting of this parameter affects the handover. Because the distance between
repeaters is long, the handover between repeaters can only be asynchronous.
This parameter
Otherwise, specifies the
the handover maydelay
fail. of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is
initialized.
The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts
immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this
parameter is used to specify a delay.
This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface.
The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested,
some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The
flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by
Abis flow.
By default, flow control on the Abis interface is performed.
This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of
the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message.
This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell
re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message.
This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec.
05.05.
In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19,
mapping to the following: {43,41,39,37,35,33,31,29,27,25,23,21,19,17,15,13,11,9,7,5}
respectively. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 5
(mapping to 33 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 19
(mapping to 5 dBm). Other transmit power levels are reserved for high-power MSs.
In a GSM1800 or GSM1900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges
from 0 to 31, mapping to the following:
This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and
{30,28,26,24,22,20,18,16,14,12,10,8,6,4,2,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,36,34,32}
6 messages. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 0
respectively.
If this parameter
(mapping is setThe
to 30 dBm). to Yes, the receive
minimum level
transmit of thesupported
power MS equalsby
the
anmeasured
MS is levelreceive
15
level in FHto
(mapping minus the Other
0 dBm). receive level obtained
transmit from the
power levels are timeslots on the
reserved for BCCH TRX.
high-power MSs.
This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request
is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the
requested bandwidth by the ActGene.
The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When
the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times.
The effect of the ActGene is from 0.5 to 1.
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.
This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the
antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the
north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction.
This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna
Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell.
Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2
This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load
measurement.
The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines
whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication
message to the BSC.
The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and
AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot,
that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages
(such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically
sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The interval for sending the CCCH
This parameter
overload specifies
message the
is CCCH interval
Load for sending
Indication the overload messages.
Period(s).
This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For
details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load
Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The
CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink
PCH overload messages.
This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication
messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the
radio resource indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle
channel in the measurement period.
The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the
parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER
threshold.
The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter.
This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to
Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the
BTS, and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.

This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the
antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the error is small.

This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the
antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power
of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power
output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds
of the error.If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller.

When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is
generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold
indicate the two thresholds of the error.
For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the
time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not
installed.
The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3
greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed.
This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize
the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized.
The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the
same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH
signals of adjacent
This parameter cells do
specifies thenot appear in
maximum the same
number frameby
of levels to which
facilitate
the the
BTSMS
RFdecoding.
power
decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power
control and static power control.
For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS,
this parameter is invalid.
For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, power control is performed on the basis of
This parameter
the power level specifies
of a TRX. the period during which interference levels are averaged.
This
Beforeparameter specifies
the BTS sends thethe threshold
radio resourceused for interference
indication message measurement.
to the BSC, the interference
The BSS
levels onmeasures the uplink
the idle channels quality
in the of the
period radio channels
specified occupied are
by this parameter by MSs, calculates
averaged. The
and reports
result is used theto interference level on eachlevels
classify the interference of theonidle
thechannels. This helps
idle channels the BSC to
into five
assign channels.
interference bands.
According
For details,tosee
theGSMstrength of interference
Rec. 08.08, 08.58, andsignals,
12.21.the interference signals are classified
into
This six interference
parameter levels.
specifies theThe values of
threshold these
used for levels are called
interference Interf. Band Thresholds.
measurement.
The
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied byThe
BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. MSs,BTS, then,
calculates
sends a radio
and reports theresource indication
interference level message
on each oftothetheidle
BSC. The BSC This
channels. compares the BSC
helps the busytoand
idle channels
assign channels.reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
message to determine
According to the strength whether to performsignals,
of interference a handover. The interference
the interference signalsband
are classified
measurement result levels.
into six interference provides Thereference
values offor threshold
these levels setting andInterf.
are called interference analysis.
Band Thresholds.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then,
If the difference
sends between
a radio resource the values
indication of two to
message thresholds
the BSC. are
Thetoo
BSCsmall, the interference
compares the busy andis
too
idle obvious.
channelsIfreported
the difference
in the between the values
measurement reportofand
twointhresholds are too great,
the radio resource the
indication
interference is not reflected.
message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is
too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates
and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to
assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
into
This six interference
parameter levels.
specifies theThe values of
threshold usedthese
for levels are called
interference Interf. Band Thresholds.
measurement.
The BSS
The BTS determines
measures the theuplink
interference level
quality of thebased on these thresholds.
radio channels occupied byTheMSs, BTS, then,
calculates
sends a radio
and reports theresource indication
interference level message
on each of tothe
theidle
BSC. The BSC This
channels. compares the BSC
helps the busytoand
idle
assignchannels
channels. reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
message
Accordingtotodetermine
the strengthwhether to performsignals,
are classified
measurement
into six result levels.
interference provides Thereference
these setting andInterf.
interference analysis.
This
For parameter
details, specifies
see GSM the threshold
Rec.interference
08.08, 08.58, used for interference measurement. Thresholds.
andbased
levels
12.21.
are called Band
The
The BTS determines the level on these thresholds. The BTS, then,
If theBSS
sends
measures
difference
a radio
the uplink
between
resource
qualityof
the values
indication
oftwo
message
the thresholds
radio channels
tothe
theidle
BSC. are occupied
ThetooBSCsmall, by
theMSs,
compares
calculates
interference
the BSC is
busytoand
and
too reports
obvious. the interference
Ifreported
the difference level on
between each of
the values ofandchannels. This
twointhresholds helps the
are too great, the
idle
assignchannels
channels. in the measurement report the radio resource indication
interference
message is not reflected.
are classified
measurement
into six result levels.
interference provides Thereference
these levels setting
are andInterf.
called interference
Band analysis.
Thresholds.
This parameter
For details, specifies
see GSM the the threshold
Rec.interference
08.08, 08.58, used for
andbased interference
12.21. measurement.
The
The BTS determines level on these thresholds. The BTS, then,
If theBSS
sends a
measures
difference
radio
the uplink
between
resource
qualityof
the values
indication
oftwo
message
the thresholds
radio channels
to the BSC. are
The
occupied
too
BSCsmall, by
theMSs,
compares
calculates
interference
the busy is
and obvious.
too reports the interference
Ifreported
the difference level on each
between of the idle
the values ofandchannels.
two Thisare
thresholds helps
toothe toand
BSCthe
great,
idle
assignchannels
channels. in the measurement report in the radio resource indication
interference
message is not reflected.
are classified
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference
into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. analysis.
For
The details, see GSM the
BTS determines Rec.interference
08.08, 08.58, andbased
level 12.21. on these thresholds. The BTS, then,
If the difference
reports betweenindication
a radio resource the valuesmessage
of two thresholds
to the BSC. are tooBSC
The small, the interference
compares the busy is
too
and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource the
obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great,
indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis.
For
If details, seeCell
Assignment GSM Rec.
Load 08.08,
Judge 08.58,
Enable is and 12.21.
set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started
If the following
if the differencetwo between the values
conditions of two
are met: The thresholds
cell supportsarethe
toodirected
small, the
tryinterference is
procedure. The
too
load obvious.
of the If the
cell is difference
greater thanbetween
or equal the
to values
the Cellof two thresholds
Direct Try are too
Forbidden great, the
Threshold.
This parameter
interference specifies
is not whether to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption,
reflected.
the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that
supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are
interested in. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery.
This
The parameter specifiesthe
BSC that supports theDRX
data service
should supported.
send the dispatching message to MSs so that
This value
the MSs of use
can the the
parameter can be The
DRX function. set as required.
period occupied by broadcast short messages
0000000001:
that are containedindicates that only themessage
in a dispatching NT14.5Kisdata service
called is supported.
a dispatching period. The
0000000010:
description and indicates
positionthat only
of the the NT12K
broadcast data
short service are
message is supported.
contained in the
0000000100: indicates
dispatching message inthat only the sequence.
the sending NT6K data service is supported.
0000001000: indicates that only the T14.4K data service is supported.
0001000000:
If this parameter indicates that
is set to only the
StartUp, theT2.4K data service
BTS transmit is supported.
power is adjusted to the maximum
0010000000:
before the BSCindicates
sends a that only the
handover T1.2K data
command service
to the is addition,
MS. In supported. the BTS transmit
0100000000: indicatesduring
power is not adjusted that only the T600BITS
the handover data service
to ensure is supported.
the success of the handover.
1000000000: indicates that only the T1200/75 data service is supported.
When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC
cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive
the handover command, thus leading to the call drop.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this
parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a
per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech
quality is good. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and
thus the speech quality is monitored.
This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC
increases the uplink transmit power.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC
decreases the uplink transmit power.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive
When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm
to -47 dBm).
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink
power control.
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink
power control.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of
downlink receive quality.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink
receive level.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential
filtering formula.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering
formula.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC
increases the downlink power.
This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC
decreases the downlink transmit power.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is
to -47 dBm).
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is
to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink
power control.
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink
power control.
downlink receive quality.
downlink receive level.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential
filtering formula.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential
filtering formula.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in
a power control period.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH
in a power control period.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power
control commands.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power
control commands.
When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this
parameter, the power control stops.
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.
0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL
In downlink
Qual. power
Bad Trig control,the
Threshold, if the downlink
value receive Upper
of DL RX_LEV qualityThreshold
is greatercontains
than or equal to this
the value of
threshold,
DL Qual. Badthen the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad
UpLEVDiff.
UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power
control.
In uplink
Level power
6: BER control,
ranges fromif 6.4%
the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual.
to 12.8%
Bad
Level
In Trig
the 7: Threshold,
BER
uplink then
thanthe
greatercontrol,
power ifactual
12.8% UL RX_LEV
the uplink receiveUpper
qualityThreshold
is greatershould contain
than or equal UL Qual.
to this
Bad UpLEVDiff.
threshold, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control.
This
Levelparameter specifies
7: BER greater thanthe maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the
12.8%
receive quality.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
receive level.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the
receive quality.
This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the
quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level.
In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0,
1-2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum
permissible down adjustment step.
When the downward
This parameter power
specifies theadjustment
AMR maximum is performed based on step
down adjustment the level, the maximum
permitted by the
permissible
quality zonedown
1 (theadjustment
RQ value isstep differs
greater thanbased onless
0 and the than
receive quality.
3) based on the signal level.
This parameter
In the Huawei II specifies the maximum
power control algorithm, step
thelength
qualityinzone
decreasing theinto
is divided signal level
three in (0,
grades
power
1-2, ≥ control when
3) based thereceive
on the RQ is 2.quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum
permissible down adjustment step.
When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible
This parameter down adjustment
specifies step differs
the maximum based
step on in
length thedecreasing
receive quality.
the signal level in
This
power parameter
control whenspecifies
the RQ theismaximum
0. step length in decreasing the signal level in
power
When
In control
the the power
Huawei when
II powerthecontrol
control RQ
stepis is
1. calculatedthe
algorithm, based on the
quality zonesignal quality,
is divided the
into upper
three grades (0,
threshold and the
1-2, ≥ 3) based onlower threshold
the receive of the
quality stable
(RQ). Everystate quality
quality zonezone
hasare set. When
different the
maximum
signal quality
permissible exceeds
down the upper
adjustment threshold or is below the lower threshold, power
step.
control
When the is performed.
downward power This parameter
adjustment specifies the lower
is performed basedthreshold of thethe
on the level, downlink
maximum
quality for power
permissible down control.
adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
The
When mapping
the power between
control the BER
step is and the quality
calculated basedlevel is assignal
on the follows:
quality, the upper
Level 0: BER
threshold andsmaller
the lower than 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
threshold
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
Level 2: BER
performed. ranges
This from 0.4%
parameter to 0.8%
specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for
Level 3:
power BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
control.
Level
Level 5:
0: BER
BER ranges
smaller from
than 3.2%
0.2% to 6.4%
Level
Level 6:
1: BER
BER ranges
ranges from
from 6.4%
0.2% to to 12.8%
0.4%
Level
Level 7:
2: BER
BER greater
ranges fromthan 0.4%
12.8% to 0.8%
The power
Level control
4: BER ranges step
fromis calculated
1.6% to 3.2% based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper
Level threshold
5: BER rangesand afromlower threshold.
3.2% to 6.4%Power control is not performed if the signal level
isLevel
between
6: BERtheranges
upperfrom
threshold
6.4% and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only
to 12.8%
when
Level the signal
7: BER level than
greater exceeds12.8% the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
When
upper the power and
threshold control stepthreshold.
a lower is calculated based
Power on the
control signal
is not quality, the
performed upper
if the signal level
threshold
is betweenandthethe lower
upper threshold
threshold andofthe
thelower
quality zone arePower
threshold. set. When theissignal
control qualityonly
performed
exceeds
when thethe upper
signal threshold
level exceedsortheis below
upper the lower threshold,
threshold or is belowpower control
the lower is
threshold.
performed. This parameter
The level values 0 through specifies
63 map to the lower
-110 dBm threshold of the uplink quality for power
to -47 dBm.
control.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
The mapping
threshold andbetween
the lowerthe BER andofthe
threshold thequality
qualitylevel
zoneisare
as set.
follows:
When the signal quality
Level 0: the
exceeds BERupper
smaller than 0.2%
threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed.
Levelparameter
This 2: BER ranges from 0.4%
determines the to 0.8%quality upper threshold of the quality zone.
uplink
Level
Note: 3:
TheBER ranges
power from
of the MS0.8% to 1.6%
and the BTS is adjusted according to the quality and the
LevelFor
level. 4: BER ranges
details, from
refer 1.6%
to the to 3.2%
Power Control 2nd Generation Control table.
Levelmapping
The 5: BER ranges
between from
the3.2% to 6.4%
BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level
Level 6:
0: BER
BER ranges
smaller from
than 6.4%
0.2% to 12.8%
Level
Level 7:
1: BER
BER greater than 0.2%
ranges from 12.8% to 0.4%
The
Levelpower
3: BERcontrol
rangesstep
fromis calculated
0.8% to 1.6%based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper
Level 4:threshold
BER rangesand from
a lower threshold.
1.6% to 3.2% Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between
Level 5: BER the upperfrom
ranges threshold and
3.2% to the lower threshold. Power control is performed only
6.4%
when theBER
Level 6: signal levelfrom
ranges exceeds
6.4%the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
to 12.8%
The
Levellevel values
7: BER 0 through
greater 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
than 12.8%
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only
when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for
predicting the level in power control.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction
function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting
This parameter
the level specifies
in power control.whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is
allowed
In Huawei byIIHuawei II poweralgorithm,
power control control algorithm.
the average filter value in the history
When this parameter
measurement is not
report is set used
to Yes,
forthe Huawei
power II power
control control
decision. algorithm
Instead, puts the
the prediction
currently
function isreceived
applied measurement reports in thethe
in the filter to compensate measurement
delay of power report compensation
adjustment.
queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and
the BTS power in the measurement report. After values are added in the measurement
report, compensate the receive level value in the history measurement report based on
the change of the power.
When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted
filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history
measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained at different transmit
power of the BTS/MS.
This parameter To ensure
specifies the accuracy
the number of the values
of measurement for sampled
reports filtering, for
thecalculating
values in the
history
the measurement
average reports
value of the that are
downlink obtained
signal qualityat a different
before the BTS transmit
power power from the
adjustment.
current power must be compensated.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power
control commands.
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the
BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this
parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the
In
DLdownlink
Qual. Badpower control, if the
Trig Threshold, the downlink receive
value of DL quality
RX_LEV Upperis greater than
Threshold or equal
contains thetovalue
the
value
of the of
DLthis parameter,
Qual. then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL
Bad UpLEVDiff.
Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the
downlink power control.
In uplink
Level power
6: BER control,
ranges fromif 6.4%
the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL
to 12.8%
In the Bad
Qual.
Level uplink
7: power
Trig
BER control,
Threshold,
greater if the
than then
12.8% theuplink
actualreceive quality
UL RX_LEV is greater
Upper thanshould
Threshold or equal to theUL
contain
value of this
Qual. Bad parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad
UpLEVDiff.
UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power
control.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
signal quality.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
receive level.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on
the receive quality.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-
2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is
set for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
This parameter
In Huawei determines
II power the maximum
control algorithm, permissible
the quality down
zone is adjustment
divided step
into three when(0,
grades RQ1-is
2.
set for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
This parameter
In Huawei determines
II power the maximum
control algorithm, permissible
the quality zone is down adjustment
divided into three step when(0,
grades RQ1-is
1.
After
set forthe BSCquality
each delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period
zone.
before receiving an
When downward acknowledgement
power message. Therefore,
adjustment is performed based on the thelevel,
MR thatthe power
maximumcontrol
decision
permissible is based
down on cannot accurately
adjustment step differs reflect
based theonradio environment
the receive quality.of the BTS during
the
Thispower
parameteradjustment,
determines but misses the latest
the maximum changes of
permissible the receive
down adjustmentlevelstep
and when
receive
RQ is
quality
0. of the BTS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.
To compensate
After the BSC deliversthe delaythe of power
power adjustment,
control command, the power control
it should algorithm
wait for implements
a certain period
the prediction
before receiving andanfiltering function. In message.
acknowledgement other words, the BSCthe
Therefore, samples
MR that several
powerdownlink
control
measurement
decision is based reports, performs
on cannot weighted
accurately filtering,
reflect and predicts
the radio environmentN measurement reports
of the BTS during
from the current
the power time onwards
adjustment, but misses in athe
short period.
latest changes of the receive level and receive
This parameter
quality of the MS. determines the number
Thus, the power of downlink
adjustment measurement reports predicted by
is delayed.
the BSC. The value
To compensate the of this of
delay parameter equals to the
power adjustment, the previous number
power control N.
algorithm implements
In Huawei
the prediction II power control function.
and filtering algorithm,Inthe average
other words,filter
the value in the history
BSC samples several uplink
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead,
measurement reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports the prediction
function
from the is applied
current in the
time filter to
onwards incompensate
athe
short the delay of power adjustment.
period.
This parameter specifies whether compensation of measurement reports is allowed
This parameter determines
by Huawei II power control algorithm. the number of uplink measurement reports predicted by the
BSC. In other words, the value of this parameter
When determining whether to perform power control, the equals toBSC
the previous
performsnumber
weightedN.
In Huawei
filtering on IIthepower
valuescontrol
of thealgorithm,
receive levelthe average
and of the filter valuequality
receive in the inhistory
several history
measurement
measurement report reports. is The
not measurement
used for powerreports controlmaydecision. Instead,bythe
be obtained theprediction
BTS/MS at
function
different is appliedpower.
transmit in the filter to compensate
To ensure the accuracy the of
delay
the of power
values foradjustment.
filtering, the values in
the history measurement reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from
the current power must be compensated.
the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
This parameter
threshold and thespecifies whether enable
lower threshold Huaweizone
of the quality II power control
are set. Whenalgorithm or Huawei
the signal quality III
power
exceeds control algorithm.
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for
power control.
The
When mapping
the powerbetween the
control BER
calculated based level is assignal
on the follows:
quality, the upper
Level 0: BER
threshold andsmaller than
the lower 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
threshold
Level 1: the
exceeds BERupper
ranges from 0.2%
threshold tobelow
or is 0.4% the lower threshold, power control is
Level 2: BER
performed. ranges
This from 0.4%
parameter to 0.8%
specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for
Level 3:
power BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
control.
Level
Level 5:
0: BER
BER ranges
smaller from
than 3.2%
0.2% to 6.4%
Level
Level 6:
1: BER
BER ranges
ranges from
from 6.4%
0.2% to to 12.8%
0.4%
Level
Level 7:
2: BER
The power
Level control
4: BER step
ranges is calculated
from based on the signal level. The signal level has an
1.6% to 3.2%
upper
Level threshold and afrom
5: BER ranges lower threshold.
isLevel
between
6: BERtheranges
upperfrom
threshold
to 12.8%
when
Level the signal
7: BER level than
greater exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
12.8%
When
upper the power and
threshold control stepthreshold.
a lower is calculated based
Power on the
control signal
is not quality, the
performed upper
if the signal level
threshold
is betweenandthethe lower
upper threshold
threshold and ofthe
thelower
quality zone arePower
threshold. set. When theissignal
control qualityonly
performed
exceeds
when thethe upper
signal threshold
level exceedsortheis below
upper the lower threshold,
threshold or is belowpower control
the lower is
threshold.
performed. This parameter
The level values 0 through specifies
63 map to the lower
-110 dBm threshold of the uplink quality for power
to -47 dBm.
control.
The
When mapping between
the power controlthe BER
calculated basedlevel is assignal
on the follows:
quality, the upper
Level 0: BER
threshold andsmaller
the lowerthan 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
threshold
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
Level 2: BER
performed. ranges
This from 0.4%
parameter to 0.8%
specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power
control.
Level
Level 5:
0: BER
BER ranges
smaller from
than 3.2%
0.2% to 6.4%
Level
Level 6:
1: BER
BER ranges
ranges from
from 6.4%
0.2% to to 12.8%
0.4%
Level
Level 7:
2: BER
The power
Level control
4: BER step
ranges is calculated
from based on the signal level. The signal level has an
1.6% to 3.2%
upper
Level threshold and afrom
5: BER ranges lower threshold.
isLevel
between
6: BERtheranges
upperfrom
threshold
to 12.8%
when
Level the signal
7: BER level than
greater exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
12.8%
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only
when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power
control commands.
This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power
control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.
This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is
measured for the uplink power control.
This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH.
This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is
used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode.
This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter
the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS
measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of
the
ThisMS output power.
parameter Thethe
specifies parameter specifies
signal strength theperiod
filter relation
in between Cnidle
the packet andmode,
Cn-1. which
is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode.
This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter
the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the
downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output
power. The parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1.
This parameter specifies the initial power level.

This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the
MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control.
This parameter is used for the open-loop power control.

The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH,
namely, PCH.
When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the
This
reducedparameter
level ofspecifies the maximum
the MS transmit power value
mapping of N3105.
to the path loss.
After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105.
Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the
N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink
RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105
This
by one parameter specifies
and resends the maximum
the downlink valueinofwhich
data block the N3103.
the RRBP field is set.
Upon
Whenreceiving the last RLC
N3105 overflows, thedata block
network when the
initiates theuplink
T3195. transmission
When the timer is complete, the
T3195 expires,
network
the current sends
TBFthe MS a Packet
abnormally Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the
releases.
N3103.
If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within
scheduled
This time,specifies
parameter the N3103 theincreases
maximum byvalue
one and the network resends the Packet Uplink
of N3101.
Ack/Nack message.
In uplink dynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if
When
the this counter
downlink overflows,
data blocks carry the
thenetwork
USF initiates the T3169. When this timer expires,
value.
This
the parameter
current TBF specifies
abnormally the release
releases. delay of the downlink TBF.
After sending the last downlink RLC data block to
After the network starts to assign a USF value and the uplink TBF
confirming (uplink
that TBF is data
all downlink
established), the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves
blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing the RLC uplink blocks this
mapping to each set
TBF but forcedly USFtheforlast
the data
uplink datanot
block sent from the
received. MS. If thekeep
Therefore, network
this receives
TBF valid
uplink
unreleaseddata by
blocks from the MS,
continuously the network
resending resets
the last downlinkthe N3101; otherwise,
data block with the the N3101
Relative
increases
Reserved Blockby one.Period (RRBP) flag. During the release delay of a downlink TBF, as long
When
This
as the this counter
parameter
upper layer overflows,
specifies
of the the
network the has
current
inactive perioduplink
of the
a requirement TBF abnormally
extended
of uplink
downlink releases.
TBF.
data transmission, the
Upon receiving
extracted the last
downlink RLC uplink
blocksRLC can data blocks
be sent (CountValue=0)
on this downlink TBF. from thesame
At the MS thattime, the
supports
status of the downlink
extendedTBF uplink TBF function,
changes the network
from release delay to does not release
downlink this uplink
transmission. In TBF
immediately
addition, during but the
set release
it to thedelay,
inactive
themode.
MS mustTo transmit
send thethe uplink
Packet RLC data
Downlink blocks
Ack/Nack
during
message inactive
on theperiod,
uplink the
dataMS cancorresponding
block use this TBF that automatically
to the becomes
RRBP to maintain theactive
instead of establishing
communication with thea network.
new uplink TBF. When
Therefore, when thetheinactive period
MS needs toexpires,
send theif uplink
no uplink
RLC
data,data block
it can sendneeds to berequest
an uplink transmitted,
throughtheChannel
networkRequestsends the MS a Packet
Description Uplink
carried in Ac
the
message with FAI=1
Packet Downlink to notify
Ack/Nack the MS of releasing the uplink TBF. In addition, when an
message.
uplink
This TBF 0
The parameter
value is specifies
inactive,
specifies a downlink
thattherelease TBF
releasedelaycanfunction
delay still
of theestablish
of the on this uplink
downlink
non-extended TBF.
TBF is
uplink disabled.
TBF.
The extended
Upon receivinguplink
the last TBF function
uplink RLC can
datagreatly improve the network
block (CountValue=0), KPIs, especially
the network sends the for
the discontinuous uplink transmission (such as interactive
MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this transmission and Ping)
services.
uplink TBF. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will
The value
notify the MS0 specifies thatthis
of releasing the uplink
extended
TBFuplink TBF function
for a period of delayisafter
disabled (Also deactivate
this parameter is set.
this function on the BSC side).
After the downlink TBF establishes successfully or after the delay time exceeds the
setting time of non-extended uplink TBF, this uplink TBF will automatically release.
The value 0 specifies that the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF is disabled.
This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be
controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level
is lower than this threshold.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the
receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the
transmission quality is worsened.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the
MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission
quality is worsened.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the
MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission
quality is worsened.
This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is
lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection
Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is
allowed.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell
are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is
allowed.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is
allowed.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is
allowed.
This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell
reselection procedure.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in
neighbor cells.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the
number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is
thought to be invalid.
This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can
receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will
receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF
multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage.
The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.
This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the
downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of
MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively
calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission
quality measurement report reaches this threshold.
This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined
when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality
measurement report is lower than this threshold.
This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty
can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.
This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives
the cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection.
This parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time.
To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the
level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold
and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as
This parameter
a candidate cell specifies whether to support the QoS optimization.
for handover.
The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS
level is determined in the subscription.
The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay
class, and throughput class.
During the negotiation of a QoS profile, an MS can apply a value for each QoS attribute.
This
Afterparameter
receiving thespecifies
requestthe policy
from theofMS,
thethe
handover
networkbetween the aunderlaid
negotiates class for subcell
each and
the overlaid
attribute subcell
of each QoS inprofile
a PS domain.
based on the current effective GPRS resources. The
In version
network V9R8, the
provides theBSC supports
negotiated theprofile
QoS PDCH with
configured in the overlaid
corresponding subcell or in the
resources.
underlaid subcell,
Not Support: QoS and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the
not supported;
underlaid subcell.
Support: QoS supported.
The overlaid-to-underlaid subcell handover, underlaid-to-overlaid subcell handover, bi-
directional handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, and no handover
This parameter
between between specifies
overlaidthe maximum
subcell transmission
and underlaid delay
subcell areofallowed
the POCforservices.
the handover
The POC services
between have subcell
the underlaid a strict and
requirement
the overlaidon the transmission
subcell delay. The
in a PS domain; networkthis
by default,
should
parametersupport
is settheto detection
no handoverof the POC service
between overlaidtype and take
subcell measures subcell.
and underlaid to reduce the
transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the
This
ABQPparameter specifies
must be lower thanthe
theupper
value limit of parameter.
of this the bandwidth for the POC services.
The POC services
POC：push to talkhave
over a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network
cellular.
should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink
bandwidth GbrValue
This parameter required
specifies by the
the lower ABQP
limit must
of the be lower for
bandwidth thanthethe
POCupper limit of the
services.
bandwidth for the have
The POC services POC services.
a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network
POC：push
should supportto talk
theover cellular.
detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink
bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower than the upper limit of the
This parameter
bandwidth for thespecifies whether to support the packet assignment, that is, the
POC services.
assignment
POC：push to of talk
the over
packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the
cellular.
takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access
the network, after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves
This
uplinkparameter
resourcesspecifies whether
for the BTS. to support
The BTS obtainsthe
thetakeover
channel of the packet
request immediate
information of the MS
assignment
by interpreting by the
the BTS. It is relative
downlink to the uplink
acknowledgment immediate
message from assignment.
the MS, and assigns the
To improve
reserved the speed
uplink of the
resources to MS
the to access
MS. Then,the
thenetwork, the BSS
MS can send the pre-allocates
data blocks. the uplink
TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel
request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment
message to the MS. Upon receiving the immediate assignment message sent by the
BTS, the MS can upload the data block. Meanwhile, the BTS needs to send the additional
When
channel both the MS
request and theto
message network
the BSC.support PFC, the QoS
Upon receiving this parameters are obtained
request message, the BSC from
the
sendsABQP
the in the PFC. immediate assignment message to the BTS to complete the setup
additional
When
of the the
TBF MS or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained
process.
from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS.
Gbr:guaranteed bit rate.
PFC: packet flow context.
ABQP：Aggregate BSS QoS Profile.
This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for
transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust
the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all
TBFs.
This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value
among MCS1-MCS9.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to
UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for
transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS
types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all
TBFs.
This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value
among MCS1-MCS9.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data
transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to
This parameter
dynamically specifies
adapt to the the
radioaverage period environment,
transmission of bit error detected.
thus improving the quality of
This parameter
links. can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for the MS to
calculate the effect
- Setting and measurement results.
Link Adaption (LA): The network dynamically adjusts the coding scheme of a channel
based on the transmission quality of the channel link. The link quality is determined by
8PSK MEAN BEP and 8PSK CV BEP carried in the Packet EGPRS Downlink Ack/Nack
message. The network selects a proper coding scheme for transmission based on the
measurement reports from the MS. For cells with good Um interface quality, the LA
mode is usually used.
Incremental Redundancy (IR): The network should retransmit only different data blocks
This
with parameter specifies
the puncturing codingthescheme.
retransmission
The MS rate threshold
buffers for the
the history CSinformation
error type of the and the
downlink
data blocksTBF to retransmitted
are change from CS4 to CS3.
through combined error correction. In the cell with bad
When the retransmission
Um interface quality, the IRrate of the
mode candownlink
achieveTBF
good is transmission
larger than orquality,
equals but
to the
thevalue
MS
of thissupport
must parameter, the CSFor
this mode. type of the
cells withdownlink
bad Um TBF changes
interface fromthe
quality, CS4IRtomode
CS3. is usually
used.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the
downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value
of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink.
To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the
first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically
adjusted based on the signal transmission quality.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS
types.
This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to
CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4.
If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink
TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of
this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink.

To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the
first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically
adjusted based on the signal transmission quality.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types.
This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1,
CS2, CS3, or CS4.
If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class
service is a kind of traffic class services.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1

(ARP1).
This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots.
When a channel is idle, this timer is started.
When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.
This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services.
This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and
PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted.
All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt
all the dynamic channels.
Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all
the dynamic channels except for the control channels.
This
Dynamicparameter specifies
channels theservices
carrying timer set to release
cannot the idle dynamic
be preempted: channel
It indicates thatafter all TBFs
the CS
on the dynamic
services cannot channel
preemptarethereleased.
dynamic channels that carry services.
If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released
immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle.
Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be
used and the timer is stopped.
When the timer expires, the dynamic channel is released.
This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.
This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold.

The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold.

The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel

conversion.
When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10,
dynamic channels are used.
This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion.
When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10,
dynamic channels are used.
This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of
TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs
+ static PDCHs). This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total
number of TCHs + PDCHs.
This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value.
Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of
one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the
frequencies of three strongest cells
This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength.

The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is
used for cell reselection.
This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell.
Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.
This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet
control channel.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the
system.
This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs
customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.
This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection.
Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted.
Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited.
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas.
When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the
target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the
signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell,
and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.
This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell.

Yes: The MS can access another cell.
No: The MS cannot access another cell.
This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation

during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1
0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.
1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.
This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31
standards.
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area.
c31standard:
When an MS in applied
the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the
c31notuse:
target not applied
cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped
area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio
channels. Therefore, the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell
reselection not only increases the signaling flow on the network and affects the
utilization of radio resources, but also greatly affects the data transmission rate of the
MS and decreases the QoS as a consequence.
When this parameter is used, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of
the neighbor cells in the same routing area is higher than that of this cell, and when the
signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard to start cell reselection.
This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported.
Yes: supported
No: not supported
This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to

the network.
This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies
many resources.
This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access.

A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the
persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.



This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random
access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request
after the channel request fails.
This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive
channel requests.
The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received
after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority
4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request
message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the
lowest priority.
lowest priority.
lowest priority.
lowest priority.
This parameter specifies the access control class.
This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PRACH.
Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.
...
Value 12 indicates
This parameter 12 PRACHs.
specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.
Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs.
...
Valueparameter
This 12 indicates four PBCCHs.
specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 4.
Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.
Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.
Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.
Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.
This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet
transfer mode.
This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet
idle mode.
This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode
after the NC NC-measurement report is sent.
The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report
is sent.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value
indicates a higher access priority.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent
through the system message broadcast in each cell.
When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative
offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires.
This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS.
Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the
BCCH is shorter than the penalty time.
Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.
This parameter specifies the type of the

interval extension
between measurement
two extension report
Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3.
Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the
network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should
contain the received signal level and BSIC.
Type 2: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the
network. For the six carriers, the BSIC must be decoded successfully and the NCC
specified by NCC_PERMITTED is carried. The measurement report should contain the
received signal level and BSIC.
Type 3: The MS does not need to decode the BSIC of the carriers that send the
measurement
This parameterreport. Thethe
specifies measurement report
frequency index ofshould contain the
the interference received signal
measurement level3
in type
and interference
of the measurement report.
extension measurement of a carrier.
This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS.
The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report
that matches the bitmap.
The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle
mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0
or em1.
This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported.

Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service.
No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS
service.
This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported.

Yes: supported
No: not supported
This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio
This parameter
Priority messagespecifies thethe
carried by routing
MS inarea color code
the Packet of a GPRS
Channel cell.message has four
Request
levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When
an MS accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel
Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for
establishing the TBF for a channel only when the radio priority reaches the access
priority of the cell.
The values of this parameter area as follows:
No packet access
This
Packetparameter
access ofspecifies
level 1 whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the
CCCH
Packetofaccess
the cell.
of levels 1-2
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE
Packet access of is used1-3
levels to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based
Packet access of levels 1-4paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional.
Yes:
In theThe
cellSPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter
reselection required by theisnetwork,
transmitted on the CCCH
the network of the
requests thecell.
MS to send
No: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE
measurement parameter
reports to control is not
its cell transmitted
reselection. on the
There are CCCH of the cell.
three network control
modes.
nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection.
nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the
network and performs automatic cell reselection.
nc2: Network control. The MS sends measurement reports to the network but does not
perform automatic cell reselection.
This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102.
Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No
use indicates that this parameter is not used.
This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet
Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A),
the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC.
Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use
indicates that this parameter is not used.
This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS
decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC.
Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use
This parameter
indicates specifies
that this the maximum
parameter countdown value of the MS.
is not used.
This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The
parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer.
Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is
set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack
message before T3198 expires, it updates the receive state of each uplink RLC data
block based on the acknowledgment bitmap contained in the message. If T3198 for the
RLC
This data block in
parameter the Pending
specifies state expires, the
the acknowledgment MS setstype
message the receive
used bystate of this data
the MS.
block
If fourto Nack pulses
access and retransmits
are used, the
the data block.
timing advance can be obtained without a polling
message.
If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by
sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.
This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and
PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment
message.
This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX
8bit: access using
(discontinuous the 8-bitisburst
reception) a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message.
11bit:
The MSaccess
stays using
in the the
DRX11-bit
modeburst
for a certain period when changing from the packet
SI13 indicates
transfer mode the access
to the packetburst
idletype.
mode. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all the
CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS
context. The reservation
This parameter specifies time depends
the timer on the
set for the MS
smaller value
to wait between
for the DRX_Timer_Max
TBF release after
and NON_DRX_TIMER.
receiving the last data NON_DRX_TIMER
block. is negotiated with the SGSN during the GPRS
attachment
When the MS ofreceives
the MS and the its
lastvalue is usually
RLC data blockhigh. Therefore,
carrying the lastthe reservation
block timeand
flag (FBI=1)
actually
confirmsdepends on RLC
that all the DRX_TIMER_MAX.
data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet
Value
Downlink0 indicates
Ack/Nack that the MScarrying
message enters the
theDRX
finalmode immediately. flag (FAI=1) and starts
acknowledgement
Value 1 indicates that
T3192 at the same time. the MS enters the DRX mode one second later. Value n indicates
that
If the MS
T3192 enters
expires, the
the MSDRX mode the
releases n seconds
TBF later. and monitors paging channels.
resources
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink
During the TBF
Assignment release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet
message.
Uplink
This Assignment
parameter message,
specifies the MS responds
the maximum intervalimmediately.
set for the MS to wait for the Packet
If the MS
Uplink does not receive
Assignment message. theAfter
Packet
theUplink Assignment
MS sends the Packetmessage during
Resource the TBF
Request or Packet
release
Downlink process,
Ack/Nack themessage
MS enters the packet
carrying idle mode.
Channel Request If the MS is in dual
Description, T3168 transfer mode,
is started to
it enters
wait thePacket
for the dedicated
Uplinkmode.
Assignment message from the network.
If the MS
Based on receives
the paging thechannel
Packet Uplink
used by Assignment
the system, message before
the network T3168 expires,
operation modes areT3168
is reset. Otherwise,
classified into Network the Operation
MS initiates the I,
Mode PSNetwork
access procedure
Operation again
Mode for fourNetwork
II, and times. If the
Packet
OperationUplink
ModeAssignment
III. message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink
TBF establishment has failed.
When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used.
When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is
used.
When the Gs interface is not configured but the PCCCH is configured, Network Operation
Mode III is used.
Configuration Policy
The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If

the number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is
high.
This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a
cell.
The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells for
None
None
This parameter should be set as required.
1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end

and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact
position of the other bits in the same burst and to
determine whether the received co-channel signals are
useful signals. If a burst is incon
Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If
the number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This
parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the
priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of
neighbor cells fo
None
None
None
None
None
None
Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the

MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs
the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in
advance.
No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the
MS is in the packet
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the

information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there
are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to
No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32
neighbor cells to the PC
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no
voice transfer. This function has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the
MS and reducing system int
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If

this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover
success rate may be affected.
None
None
None
As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a

concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL
subcell. The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell
can use different frequency reuse modes.
The concentric cell technology can be combined
None
When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not

configured in the UL subcell.
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power

transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function
has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the
MS and reducing system interference
2.
TheOn the downlink
average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment
is allowed.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level
of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to
camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and
the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the
parameter based
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and

boards in this BTS will be activated.
Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells,
TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.
When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be
set to Not Activated
Generally, if the
the timeslots Active
are State of the
automatically upper-level
calculated and
BTS is set The
assigned. to Not Activated.
timeslots, however, can be also manually
assigned to meet the requirement of operators. The
manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when
the timeslot is arranged.
The manually assigned OML timeslots can only be modified
manually.
This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

None
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied

subrack.
None
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied

E1 port.
If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface
board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must
be set to different E1 ports on the interface board.
This parameter is to be viewed only.
None
None
None
The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all

versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF
FH, including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The double-
Adjust the cell
transceiver BTSscoverage
supportarea by configuring
the baseband theRF
FH and Power
FH,
Level; however,
including when FH
the timeslot theand
antenna
frameisFH,
over high
but do and covers
not support
too
the many cells, you
cross-cabinet should lower
baseband FH. the antenna and increase
the tilt of the antenna first. When the transmit power of a
BTS reduces, the indoor coverage becomes worse.
Generally, for cells of the same priority in a network, the
power level configuration should ensure that the EIRPs of
the cells are basically the same.
When configuring the power level, you should note that
different TRXs in a cell can have different losses due to
different
None combination modes.
None
The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is.
In other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the
TRX with higher priority.
None
None
This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the

cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the
TRX output power, resulting in the failure of channel
allocation.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and
physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this
parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.
This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set
to Auto.
You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to
Manual.
When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is 0.
None
None
None
None

transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no
voice transfer.
The value This
of this function correlates
parameter has the following benefits:
with Cell ExtType. If
1. On
this the uplink:
parameter is decreasing
set to a toothe power
small consumption
value, of the
the handover
MS and reducing
success rate maysystem interference
be affected.
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the
BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing
intermodulation inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency
interference is reduced and the network quality is improved.
The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable
this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC
side.
If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX
None be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
cannot
If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of
this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in
a cell.
None
None
None
None
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level

of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to
camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and
the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the
parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink
and downlink levels.
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment
is allowed.
coverage, this parameter
The DTX function allows ashould be settotostop
transmitter No.power
transmission lasts
in the case of for
no a longtransfer.
voice time, and therefore
This the
function
subscriber cannot wait
has the following benefits:and hooks on. It is recommended
that
1. Onthis
theparameter be set tothe
uplink: decreasing Yes.power consumption of the
MS and reducing system interference
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the
BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing
intermodulation inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency
interference is reduced and the network quality is improved.
None
None
None
None
None
None
When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU

board exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the
power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data
configuration detects that the power sharing must be used,
but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is
disabled. The power must be adjusted or the downlink
power control must be enabled.
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel
seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient
half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the
capacity of the BSC is reduced.
If this
If this parameter
parameter isis set
set to
to aa higher
lower value,
value,the
thehalf-rate
half-rate
channels
channels are
are assigned
assigned to to the
the MS
MS only
only when
when the
the channel
channel
seizure
seizure ratio
ratio of
of overlaid
overlaid subcell
subcell is
is very
very low.
high.The calls use the
Insufficient
half-rate channel even if there are enough full-rate
half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the
channels,
capacity ofwhich influences
the BSC the speech quality.
is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel
seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the
half-rate channel even if there are enough full-rate
channels, which influences the speech quality.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence

may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may
not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the
judgment is imprecise.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the
SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of

accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of
channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set
to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels
caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the
impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system
response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is
degraded.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference
indication message will not be reported even though the
interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the interference indication message will be reported even
though no interference exists.
None
None
None
None
None
It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in

multiband network.
None
None
Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH

Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail in
the concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends
that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot
If this parameter
arrangement can is
beset too small,initthe
performed cannot
cell. correctly indicate
the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the
rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and
affects the network performance.
If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation
algorithm becomes less sensitive and consequently the
SDCCHs stay in idle state and cannot be rolled back for a
long
If thisperiod of time.
parameter is set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell
may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be
initiated, thus affecting the access of users. It is
meaningless to set the parameter too large.
If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a
small number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell
are in idle state;
If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is
a large number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests
cannot meet the requirements.
The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates.
Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3.
The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR
ACS (F/H).
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the

ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40
kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the
coding
None rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the
coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding
rates can be selected simultaneously.
If only one coding rate is specified by this parameter, then
the parameter AMR Starting Mode (H) must be set to 0,
which means the lowest coding rate. All AMR coding rate
None
adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment
hystereses (H) are meaningless.
If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then
AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H), AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL
Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR
coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate
adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless.
The AMRcoding
If three ACS (F/H) contains
rates at most
are specified byfour
thiscoding rates.then
parameter,
Therefore,
AMR Starting theMode
value(H)
of can
this be
parameter
set to 0,ranges
1, or 2.from
The 0 to 3.
The values 0AMR
parameters to 3 UL
match those
Coding of adj.th1
Rate the coding
(H),rates
AMR ULof AMR
Coding
ACS
Rate(F/H).
adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other
AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding
rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless.
None
If four coding rates are specified by this parameter, then
AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the
AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding
rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningful.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the

ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2
kbit/s
None to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the
coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the
coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding
rates can be selected simultaneously.
If only one coding full rate is specified by this parameter,
then AMR Starting Mode (F) must be set to 0. All the AMR
None
coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are
meaningless.
If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then
AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL
Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding
rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless.
If three coding rates are specified by this parameter, then
AMR
If thisStarting
parameterMode (F) can
is set to a be set value,
great to 0, 1,the
or call
2. The
completion
parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F),
rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network AMR ULisCoding
Rate adj.hyst1
improved. This,(F), AMR DLincreases
however, Coding Rate adj.th1(F),
the load of the and
BSC.AMR
DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR
coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are
To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is
meaningless.
recommended that the
If four coding rates are default value
specified Different
by this Band be
parameter, then
used. That is, Mode
AMR Starting the frequency
(F) can beband of 0,
set to the1,preferentially
2, or 3. All the
reassigned
AMR codingchannel is different
rate adjustment from what
thresholds is used
and in theare
hysteresis
original assignment.
meaningful.
Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during
an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this
parameter must be set to No.
If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short
messages.
In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled

to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission
on the signaling processing rate. For terrestrial
transmission, the default value of this parameter is No.
None
The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B,
and 0-4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for
local use in the network. Priorities 0-4 are used for
subscribers all over the world.
If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the
If this parameter
support is set
of the MSC, to MS
HLR, Yes,(including
the BSC initiates a re-
SIM) is required.
assignment when receiving an assignment failure message
from the Um interface. This helps to improve the call
completion rate and the QoS of the network. If there are a
large number of assignment failure messages, the BSC
initiates many re-assignment procedures and thus the BSC
load increases.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with C/I

in GSM.
RSCP, Received Signal Code Power
None
None
None
Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR.
None
None
position is still available, the MS reports the measurement
results of other neighboring cells regardless of the bands at
which the neighboring cells are located.
If this parameter is set to 2, the MS reports the
measurement results of two neighbor cell known and
permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the
band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports
the measurement result of the neighbor cell at the band
serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the
redundant position is still available, the MS reports the
measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of
For
the a 900/1800
bands MHzthe
at which CoBCCH
neighbor cell,cells
it is are
recommended
located. that
this parameter
If this parameter beisset toto
set Yes.
3, the MS reports the
For a 1800 MHz
measurement cell inof
results the dual-band
three neighbor network, it is and
cells known
recommended
permitted by the that
NCCthisatparameter
each bandbe setthe
with to Yes.
best signal (the
If theserving
band A5/4-7 the
encryption
current algorithm is used, itThe
cell not included). is MS reports
recommended
the measurement thatresult
this parameter be setcell
of the neighbor to Yes.
at the band
If this parameter
serving the currentis set
celltoin athe
small value, radio
redundant linksIfare
position. thelikely
to be faultyposition
redundant and therefore call drops the
is still available, occur.
MS reports the
If this parameter
measurement is setoftoother
results a great value, cells
neighbor a long time lastsof
regardless
before
the bandsan MS disconnects
at which a call, and
the neighbor cellstherefore
are located.resource
usage
When is low.
the Thisvolumes
traffic parameter takes effect
of multiple bandson are
the the
downlink.
same
and there is no special requirement on the band, the MBR
(Multi Band Report) is set to 0. When the traffic volumes of
multiple
None bands are different and the MS is expected to enter
a band preferentially, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to
3. In other cases except the first two cases, the MBR (Multi
Band Report) is set to 1 or 2. For details, see GSM Rec.
This
05.08.parameter can be used to control network load based
on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from
accessing the network. It is recommended that this
parameter be not used.
This parameter can be used to control network load based

on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from
accessing the network. It is recommended that this
parameter be not used.
This parameter should be set as required: In the areas
where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to
4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells
where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the
traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be
set to 1.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through
rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is
not obvious.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through

rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is
not obvious.
If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment
retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to
No, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is
not sent.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS
can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
None
None
None
None
None
None
Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the
double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200
parameter.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm
N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC
does not send the LAPDm N200 parameter.
IfIftimer
a BTST200
doesisnot
setsupport
to a toothis
small value, the
parameter, transmit
the end
parameter
may
should mistakenly
be set to regard that the the
No. Otherwise, linkBTS
is faulty andbethe data
cannot
transmission
initialized. fails before the transmit end receives a
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
and the T200
If timer success rate
is set toof transmission
a too small value,is reduced.If T200
the transmit endand
N200mistakenly
may are set to too great
regard values,
that theischannels
the link are
faulty and seized
the data all
along when the
transmission link
fails is faulty.
before Thus, resources
the transmit are wasted.
end receives a
and the T200
the transmit endand
N200 are set to too
may mistakenly great
regard values,
that theischannels
the link are
faulty and seized
the data all
along when the
transmission link
fails is faulty.
end receives a
and the T200
the transmit endand
N200mistakenly
may are set to too great
regard values,
that theischannels
the link are
faulty and seized
the data all
along when the
transmission link
fails is faulty.
end receives a
and the T200
the transmit endand
N200 are set to too
regard values,
that theischannels
the link are
faulty and seized
the data all
along when the
transmission link
fails is faulty.
end receives a
and the T200
the transmit endand
N200 are set to too
regard values,
that theischannels
the link are
faulty and seized
the data all
along when the
transmission link
fails is faulty.
end receives a
If
andtimer
the T200 is set
success toof
rate a too small value,
transmission the transmit
is reduced.If end
T200 and
may
N200mistakenly regard
are set to too greatthat the link
values, theischannels
faulty and the
are data all
seized
transmission
along when the fails before
link the transmit
is faulty. end receives
Thus, resources a
are wasted.
and the success rate of transmission is decreased. If T200
and N200 are set to too great values, the channels are
seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are
Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to
wasted.
the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS
access level. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than
RACH Min.Access Level.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable
error for the random access signal is high and an MS can
easily access the network. But the error report rate is high.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the error report
rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the
network.
function.
BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal
TRX in this cell.
BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions
after the originally configured BCCH TRX is recovered.
Baseband FH aiding: When the TRX involved in baseband
FH in the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is performed in the
cell, baseband FH aiding occurs and the cell is initialized as
a non-hopping cell.
Baseband FH aiding switchback: When all the TRXs involved
in baseband hopping in the cell are recovered and the
originally configured BCCH TRX is normal, baseband FH
aiding switchback can be performed and the cell is restored
to the baseband FH mode.
None
After TRX aiding (BCCH aiding or baseband FH aiding) or
switchback occurs, the cell is re-initialized.
All
Thetypes
AMR of BTSs has
coding will strong
not perform the aiding function
anti-interference within
capabilities.
15 minutes
Under afterframe
the same the default cellrate
erasure is initialized
(FER), the(you
AMRcan coding
configureathe
supports lowBTSs in this
C/I ratio period). with non-AMR coding. If
compared
the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is
improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
period
The AMR (480ms))
coding in
has AMR coding
strong mode can be a
anti-interference little more
capabilities.
than that in non-AMR coding mode.
Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding
supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If
improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
period
The AMR(480ms))
coding in
hasAMR coding
capabilities.
than
Underthat
thein non-AMR
same framecoding
erasuremode.
rate (FER), the AMR coding
improved. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH
period
The AMR(480ms))
coding in
hasAMR coding
capabilities.
than that in non-AMR coding mode.
Under the same frame erasion rate (FER), the AMR coding
improved. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH
period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more
than
If thethat in of
value non-AMR coding mode.
the parameter is too high, the cells with
heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that
the handover does not make sense. If the value of the
parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target
cells.
For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter
must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of
the
None BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure
the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This
parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST
during asynchronous handover.
For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this
Properly
parameter setting
does this parameter
not affect can increase
MS access but affects the paging
the
success rate. If this parameter is set
reporting of CCCH_LOAD_IND. If the level receivedto a too great byvalue,
the
congestion
BCCH on the may occur.side is greater than the RACH Busy
network
Threshold, the CCCH_LOAD_IND is counted once whether
the decoding is successful. The RACH whose level is lower
than the RACH Busy Threshold and whose decoding is
successful is also counted. The measurement period is the
Average RACH Load Timeslot Number.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS easily
considers that the RACH timeslot is busy and reports
overload messages to the BSC. If the value is too great, the
If
BTSthecannot
value of this parameter
determine does
the status ofnot
thematch
RACH with the value
timeslot
The physical
supported
correctly. byinformation
the BTS, anisalarm sent is
over the FACCH. Four TDMA
generated.
frames
For the are sentifeach
BTS24, time at theisinterval
this parameter used toofdetermine
18 ms. If thebusy
value of T3105
timeslot, is smaller
its setting than orwith
is consistent equalthatto 18 ms,BTS30.
in the the BTS If
needs to retransmit
this parameter is thethelevelphysical information
threshold for valid to the MS
random
when
access,the
itstimer
settingT3105 expires for
is consistent thethat
with firstintime.If the
the BTS20.
transmission
The settings of of the
the BTS312,
physical BTS3001C,
informationBTS3001C+,
over the FACCH is
not complete,
BTS3002C, andthe expiration is invalid
double-transceiver BTSbecause
must bethe time is
consistent
shorter
with thethan an
meaning FACCH
and period.Considering
requirement of
The value of this parameter can be increased when the the
BTS30. previous
factors,
handover 20becomes
ms is theslow reasonable minimumsuccess
or the handover value for this
rate
parameter. At present,
decreases because the default
of clock problemsvalue of this parameter is
or poor
70 ms.
transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max
Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout
is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO
DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.
This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is
applied.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more

difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter, the more difficult

for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier
During a handover
for the BSC to handdecision,
over the ifMSthis
to parameter is set to
a TDD 3G cell.
Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target
handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If this parameter
is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the
target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells; If this
parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and
if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G
candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO Preference
Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
None
If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to

be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to
ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is
unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to
ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is
unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.
This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving

handover.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered

value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is
inaccurate.

inaccurate.

difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.
difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load

in the UL subcell is increased.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow

load is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow

load is increased.
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow
load is increased.
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow

load is increased.

difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL
subcell can be triggered.

difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL
subcell can be triggered.
If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load

balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is
adversely affected.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load

in the OL subcell is increased.

None
None

This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is

applied.



The greater the value of this parameter is, the more difficult
During the handover
for the BSC decision:
to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier
If
forthis
theparameter is set
BSC to hand tothe
over Preference
MS to anfor
FDD2G3G
Cell, the BSC
cell.
first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate
cells.
If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC
first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate
cells.
If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By
Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell
among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO
Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is
None
preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.
None
None
None

in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share
the traffic.

in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share
the traffic.
This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than

or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.

When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no

penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is
imposed. That is, the call can still be handed over to the
previous target cell after the penalty time.
None
None
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric

Allowed parameter is set to Yes.


None
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.

For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC
handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells.
Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is
Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example,
900/1800 MHz cells), incoming BSC handovers occur
frequently and are generally not triggered at the edges of
adjacent cells. In this case, the recommended value of this
parameter is Overlaid Subcell. In the case that success rate
of handovers drops, UL Subcell is preferred for incoming
BSC handovers.
None
None
None
When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH

in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the
MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In this case,
Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.
None
None

difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced

concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the
UL subcell is determined by different factors.
#N/A
None



None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the

candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level
based on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking
of candidate cells. Generally, it is set to 0.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may

easily occur.
Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located

at the fourth layer.
None
This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX

Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.
This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover for

a certain period.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell

handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too
great value, the system resources may be wasted when
intra-cell handovers occur frequently.
When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this
parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the
difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult
the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult
the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system
traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this
parameter is set to a too small value, the judgment on
whether the MS fast passes a cell may be incorrect.
The setting of this parameter affects the width of the

handover strip during load handover.
The setting of this parameter affects the load handover

time. If it is set to a too greater value, the handover time of
each level is long.
The setting of this parameter determines the maximum

width of the handover strip during load handover.
The setting of this parameter affects the load handover

targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number
of handover requests that are rejected increases.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the

load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of
load handovers increases.
The value of this parameter should not be set too high. Load
handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower
than the setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the load on
the system is increased.

handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value,
the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value,
the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn,
is used in interference handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink

set to a too small value.











If the number of consecutive measurement reports without
the downlink measurement report is greater than the value
of this parameter, the handover decision related to no
downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore,
if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink
measurement report handover cannot be triggered.
The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink
receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this
parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher
value, the no downlink measurement report handover
cannot be triggered.
This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level

drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following

requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 =
80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in
which the receive level drops rapidly.








uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.
This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA

emergency handover.isInset
When this parameter thetoareas
0 andwith small
if the space
measurement
between BTSs and
report indicates densely
that DTX is distributed
not used, theBTSs, the coverage
FULLSET values
of the cell
should can be reduced
be selected. if this
When this parameter
parameter is is
setset
to to a lower
0 and if
value.
the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the
SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the
SUBSET values should be used irrespective of how DTX is
indicated in the subsequent measurement reports.
When this parameter is set to 1, whether the FULLSET
values or the SUBSET values should be selected depends on
the DTX
If this indication
parameter is bit
setintothe measurement
a too great value,report. Thatcell
the target is, if
the measurement
for the report indicates
previous handover that
will not be DTX is for
selected used,
thethe
next
SUBSET
handover, values should
but the be selected;
probability of callotherwise, the FULLSET
drop increases. If this
values should be selected.
parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of
handover failure increases.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell
for the previous handover will not be selected for the next
handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell
for the previous handover will not be selected for the next
handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this
inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be
modified.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the
penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words,
triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.

modified.


modified.

modified.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to

ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher
value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original
serving cell.
serving cell.
serving cell.
This
value,parameter
the MS is specifies the
unlikely to bepenalty
handedlevel
overimposed on a
to the original
target
servingcell.
cell.A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to
avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of
the following reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating
internal handover refusal is received, a message indicating
Um interface handover failure is received during out-going
BSC handover, or a message indicating Um interface
handover failure is received during internal handover. This
parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell
When
penalty this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of
time.
sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is
delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.
When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the

degraded.


When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of

sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is
delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels

caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the
degraded.
Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the
signal strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number
of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of
this parameter, all previous measurement reports are
discarded and the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei
recommends that this parameter be set to a great value for
emergency handovers.
If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or
equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can
be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry.
This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate

and flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is
sent at a high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is
increased.
When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance

measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is
set to No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT
handovers, load handovers, and concentric cell handovers)
that require power compensation may fail.
In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two

timeslots
When thisconfigured
parameterinis SDCCH/8
set to NO,scheme,
the BSCthen this
preprocesses the
parameter
measurement should be set
reports. In to No.
this case, the Transfer Original
MR, Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of
preprocessed MR parameters are invalid.
When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis
interface and the load of the BSC are reduced. Thus, the
response time is shortened and the network performance is
improved.
When setting this parameter, you should determine
whether
If the BTS supports
this parameter the configured
is set to Yes, the MS doespower control
not use the
algorithms.
maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success
rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If

you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set
the related penalty time and penalty level to 0.
This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH

handover is allowed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent

handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a
too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.
This
If thisparameter
parameterisisused to aavoid
set to unwanted
too small value,handovers
frequent due to
inaccurate measurement
handovers cannot reports
be avoided. generated
If this parameterin the initial
is set to a
phase
too greatof call establishment.
value, handovers cannot be performed timely.
If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you
can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed Measurement
Reports
This smaller can
parameter thanbethe
usedreport frequency
to avoid of thehandovers
unwanted
measurement
due to inaccurate reports from the MS.
measurement Therefore,
reports in the it is phase
initial
recommended that Min Interval for SDCCH HOs be set to a
of call establishment.
small
If value.
measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you
If measurement
can reports are
set Report Frequency of processed on the BSC
the Preprocessed side, the
Measurement
frequency of receiving
Reports smaller than themeasurement reports
report frequency on the BSC
of the
side is greater reports
measurement than thatfromon the
the MS.
BTS Therefore,
side. Therefore,
it is it is
recommended
recommended that that Min
Min Interval
Interval for
for SDCCH
TCH HOs HOsbe be
setset
to ato a
great value.
small value.
If measurement reports are processed on the BSC side, the
frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC
side is greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, it is
recommended that Min Interval for TCH HOs be set to a
great value.
None
According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH

frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT
BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the
RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the
cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.
Thus, the TCHs
According to theon non-BCCH
P/N criterion,frequencies are
if the load of reserved for
a non-BCCH
other calls.isThis
frequency ensures
higher than the
the call
Loadperformance
Threshold forof TIGHT
other calls.
BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the
RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the
cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.
Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequencies are reserved for
other calls. This ensures the call performance of other calls.
None
The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more

difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover can
be triggered.

difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover can
be triggered.

difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.
The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell

F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the
number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too
great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the
candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. This leads
to handover
1. This failures
parameter or call
must drops. set because it limits the
be properly
2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when
number of candidate cells. If this parameter is setthe receive
to a too
level
greatminus
value,this
someparameter is greater
desired cells may bethan the minimum
excluded from the
access level offset.
candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This leads to
handover failures or call drops.
2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the uplink
receive level minus this parameter is greater than the
minimum access level offset.
None
Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the

priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer
HO Threshold.
If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer
HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based
on receive level. The cell takes a low priority for handovers.
None

difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

difficult the edge handover can be triggered.



This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge

HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call
drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the
relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge

HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call
drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the
relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
None
None
None
None
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In

other words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled.
The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower
the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered
hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell
has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the
target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold.
If this parameter is set to Yes, a call is handed over to the
target cell that has a higher priority than the serving cell.
Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be
enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce
cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and
In dual-band
adjacent networking
channel mode for densely populated urban
interference.
areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The
propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater
than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band.
Considering the preceding factors, you can enable the
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed for the DCS1800 cell.
Under normal conditions, this parameter is set to No. To
support the rapid level drop handover, the BSC must have
It
theis original
recommended
MR. that this handover be applied only in
special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The
fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used
only in special conditions.
If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be

introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is
used.
Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas,

common urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for high-
speed circumstances
When the authentication and ciphering procedures are

enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set
to Yes.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the

MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal
quality.
None
None
None
The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should

guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell
reselect offset.
The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum
interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and
C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS
The value of
constantly CBQ affects
checks whether the a access of the MS
cell reselection is to the
required by
system.
referring to following conditions:
Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops
below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large.
C2isof
It an appropriate
recommended non-serving
that you selectcell exceeds
a greater that of
value, theas
such
serving
16, 20, or cell in in
25, 5sthe
andarea the with
following
heavy conditions
traffic, but are met:
a smaller
 The such
value, C2 ofas a new
2 or cell
3, ininthe another
area withLAC light
minus CRH
traffic.
An MS doesinnot
(broadcast therespond
systemto pagings during
information 3 andlocation
4 of theupdate.
serving
Thus,
cell) the connection
exceeds
To properly C2 of the
specify therate drops
serving
value if cell
ofcell
this reselection
inparameter,
5s. it is
is
performed.
A cell reselection
necessary is performed
to perform overall and in the last 15s,
long-term and the C2 of
measurement
If
the
on this
new
the parameter
cell minus
entities is 5
involvedset
dBto a too small
constantly
regarding value,
exceeds
their ping-pong
the C2 of the
processing
location
serving
capability updates
cell in 5s.
and occursuch
traffic, andas the signaling
the processing loadcapability
on the SDCCH of
increases.
A better
the MSC and cell BSC,
existsand if the
theabove
load on conditions are met.If
the A interface, a
Abis
If this parameter
better cellUm
interface, exists, is set
the MSHLR,
interface, to a too
reselects great
and VLR. value, the cell
a cell,and does not go to that
the
The MS camps
previous
location onwithin
cell
update forperiod
a long
5s. in time
themay
MSCnot mustbe be
thegreater
best afterthan
the
thatLA in changes.
the BSC.
In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is
identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location
update request within a long period.
The
When larger
the MS thisreselects
parameter is set,cell
another the(inlarger the number
the same LAC), the of
paging sub-channels
MS is restarted through in aT3212
cell and the smaller
timeout the number
if the T3212 of the of
MSs
new on celleach paging
differs from sub-channel.
that of the original Setting this parameter
cell.
larger
When this can parameter
prolong thediffersaverage service
in the cellslife of MS
of the samebatteries
LAC, it
but increase
is possible thethe
that delayMS of paging messages
is identified as implicit and reduce
off-line if the
system
MS sends performance.
no location update request for a long period. In
this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power
off." even though the called MS is on.
None
In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same
in all cells.
The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with
the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too
many call drops.
The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this
parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0,
only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an
If
MS the
is number of RACH
not allowed. This conflicts
conditioninapplies
a cell istosmall, T should
a dual-network
be set to acell.
coverage great
Forvalue. If the cell,
a common numberthis of RACH conflicts
parameter shouldinbea
cell
set tois large,
0. T should be set to a small value. The increase
in
The T and
valueS of
prolongs the access
CBA affects time ofaccess
the network an MS,ofthus affecting
an MS.
the access performance of the whole network. Therefore,
appropriate values should be selected for T and S.
When the network traffic is heavy, the success rate of
immediate assignment is low if the sum of S and T is low.
Thus, the value of T should be properly adjusted to make
the sum of S and T great.
When Abis interface use the satellite transmission,this
None
parameter must be 32.
None
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.


handover success rate.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the

channel load and influence the access success rate.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio

resources too much, and influences the channel resource
utilization.
call reestablishment success rate.





assignment success rate.



immediate assignment success rate.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intra-

cell handover.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover

is performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the
synchronous handover is performed.
If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be

made in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too
large, a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering
of TRXparameter
If this aiding function
is set after cellsmall
to a too initialization.
value, the BSC
initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload
message from the BTS. That is, the minimum receive level
of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends
the overload message to the BSC when a large number of
MSs access the network. In this case, system failure may
occur.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth

is occupied by services.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the
proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value
of the major service should be smaller than that of the
minor service. It is recommended that the default value be
used.
used.
used.
used.
None
None
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS

frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus,
the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot
access the network.
If the value of this parameter is too small,
great, the BTS sends an
frequently reports overload
overload message to the BSCindication messages
with a long interval.toThus,
the BSC.
As a result,
system the
faults BSCoccur.
may frequently reports overload indication
messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow
control. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS
sends overload indication messages to the BSC only when a
large number of MSs access the network and when the
system resources are insufficient. Therefore, the access
If the value
requests on of this
the parameter
RACH and all is
thetoo small, the
messages onsignaling
the PCH are
traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of
discarded.
the BSC increases. If the value of this parameter is too
great, the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in
time.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource
status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, RF
resource status is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC
cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource
indication messages are reported frequently and thus the
load of the BSC is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource
status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot
handle the interference in the BTS in time.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.
None
If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.
None
For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this

parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power

reduces too much. If the value of this parameter is too
small, the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction
effect is not good.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the average

result cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of
this parameter is too small, the averaging is performed too
frequently and resources are wasted.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the

BTS transmits at full power increases. The interference
increases. The handover success rate, however, is
increased to some extent.
For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported.
For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs

(O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes.
The RF connection supports the configuration of the main
and diversity antennas. This parameter is configured for
only the BTS3002C.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power

adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm

cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be
guaranteed.

guaranteed.

guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor

without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is
degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power
control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is

good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced
and the network interference is increased. If this parameter
is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power
control, thus the conversation quality is degraded.
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is
poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality
is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced.
parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level
becomes low, andiscall
If this parameter set drop maygreat
to a too easily occur.
value, the uplink level
The value of this parameter is equal to that of the UL
Expected Level at HO Access.
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the

currently received measurement reports in the
measurement report compensation queue and then records
the change of the transmit power based on the MS power
and the BTS power in the measurement report.
quality. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
caused by thesome
On receiving number of measurement
consecutive reports.
measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the uplink signal
of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must
caused
On by thesome
receiving number of measurement
levels. This average value indicates the radio environment
caused by thesome
caused by the number of measurement reports.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power
control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too
small value, the power control may be performed
frequently, thus wasting the resources.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic

power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm
a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot
be guaranteed.

be guaranteed.

be guaranteed.

be guaranteed.

be guaranteed.

be guaranteed.
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the

currently received measurement reports in the
measurement report compensation queue and then records
the change of the transmit power based on the MS power
and the BTS power in the measurement report.
caused by thesome
caused by thesome
caused by thesome
caused by the number of measurement reports.
None

is reduced.
is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal
quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the
conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to
a too small value, the signal quality is good without power
control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
becomes low, andiscall
If this parameter set drop maygreat
to a too easily occur.
value, the uplink level
The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected
Level at HO Access.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power
control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too
small value, the power control may be performed
frequently, thus wasting the resources.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of

the history value in the interference measurement results
decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the
proportion of the history value in the interference
measurement results increases.
None
None
Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power

of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the output power of the MS increases.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the

network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of
None
the frequent TBF release increases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF
may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of
current cell in the network caused by the MS activities, and
the network still assigns the radio resources to the MS), the
If this parameter
network is set to
cannot release a lower
this value,
TBF, thus the abnormal
wasting the networkuplink
TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103.
resources.
IfBased
this parameter
on the actual is set to a higher
condition value, the
of existing release
network (fortime of
the uplinkthe
example, TBFN3105
delaysoverflow
due to no response
caused by theof the
badMS Umcaused
If
by this
theparameter
interface bad is set
Um interface
quality, the toquality,
a lower
unstable value,
thus the link
occupying
transmission tolerance
the link
quality, ofand
the
network
resources toof uplink
the MS activities),system. errors decreases
you should properlyandadjust
the probability
this parameterof
the
to frequent
Based
ensure theTBF
on the release
actual
downlink TBFincreases.
condition doesof not
existing network
abnormally (for
release
If
duethistoparameter
example, thethe N3101
frequent is set to a higher
overflow
overflow thevalue,
caused
of the bad
by the
N3105. abnormal
Um TBF
may occurquality,
interface (such as thethe MS hastransmission
unstable not receivedlink the quality,
message andof
current cell in the network
the MS activities), you should caused by the
properly MS activities,
adjust this parameterthe
If
tothis
network parameter
ensure still
theassigns is set
uplink thetouplink
TBF a higher
does value, this
resources
not abnormally to the wastes
MS), the
release due to
wireless
network
the frequent resources
cannot overflow andofinfluences
release this
the TBF,
N3101. the the
thus access
wasting the network
performance
resources. of other MSs in the network, thus causing the
useless
Based on signaling
the actual seizing the channel
condition bandwidth
of existing network and
(for
wasting
example,the thedownlink resources.
N3101 overflow caused by the bad Um
If this parameter
interface quality, is theset to a lower
unstable value, the link
transmission uplink TBF and
quality,
frequently releasesyou
the MS activities), andshould
establishes,
properly thus increasing
adjust the
this parameter
delay
to ensurefor the
thedelay
uplinktests
TBF ofdoes thenotAttach and Pingrelease
abnormally services.due to
If
The
thethis parameter
original
frequent is setTBF
downlink
overflow oftothe
aishigher
released
N3101. value, the release
immediately and delay
of the uplink
cannot be used TBFtoincreases, thus wastingdownlink
transmit subsequent the uplink data.
resources.
Therefore, a new TBF must be established. The original
If this
this parameter
downlink
If TBF alsois
parameter set
set to
iscannotto a belower
a usedvalue,
higher for the
a new
value, thisuplink
requirementTBF of
can increase
frequently
uplink data releases and
transmission. establishes,
Therefore,
the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on thethus
the increasing
duration and the
delay
success
PACCH, forthus
the greatly
rate delay
of the tests
TBF of thethe Attach
establishment
reducing and Ping
TBF services.
are greatly
downlink affected.
The most optimized
establishment time; value
however, should beMS
if the a little
needs greater
to send thannewthe
intervaldata,
uplink betweenbecausetwo the
discontinuous
BSC6000 does uplinknottransmissions.
support the
uplink establishment function on the uplink at present, the
reserved uplink TBF must be released and a new TBF must
be established to transmit the new data. Therefore, the
overall transmission performance decreases.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, this can decrease
the probability
If this parameter of is
establishing
set to a higher the downlink
value, theTBF on the
load-based
PACCH. The downlink TBF must establish
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter on the CCCH,
is setthus
to
increasing
a lower value, the the
establishment
load-based time. reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of

times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases,
and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this
parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that
the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the
critical reselectionisisset
If this parameter triggered easily.
to a higher value, the number of
critical reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of
critical reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell

reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the number of cell reselections decreases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of

the cell reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a
lower value, the probability of the cell reselection
decreases.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of

decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher
value, the decision may not be performed immediately.
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the

previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a
lower value, the weight of current signal level increases.
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the

MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to

trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-based
reselection.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical

reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be

handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection
fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time
longer than this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces.
If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be

handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a
higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed over to the
target cell only if the target cell has a lower level.
The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong

reselection between cells.
None
None
This parameter is configured according to the congestion of

the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the
underlaid voice services are congested, the overlaid-to-
underlaid subcell handover is only allowed; if the overlaid
voice services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid
handover is only allowed.
None
None
None
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the

MS reduces.

MS reduces.
None
For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the
parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface
quality, set the parameter to MCS4.
None
None
None
proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is;
otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history
information sent by the MS is.
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to

decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.



increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to increase the CS type.


None
None






None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of

services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.

bandwidth.

bandwidth.

bandwidth.
bandwidth.

bandwidth.

bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis

timeslots cannot be fully used.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots
may be applied frequently.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS

services are affected.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services
are affected when there are too many PS services.
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic

channel resources may be wasted when there are no
services for a long time.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that
a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being
released. Therefore,
This parameter the dynamic
is configured channel
according to request is sent
the congestion
frequently.
counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice
services.
If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is
converted at the UL cell.
If the OL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is
If this parameter
converted is set
at the OL to a lower value, the TBFs
cell.
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and
the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher.
If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and
the downlink
If this bandwidth
parameter is set tofor each subscriber
a lower is lower.
value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and
the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher
If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and
the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is lower.
If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic

channels.
If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.
If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic

channels.
If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are

excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS
services.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are
insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS
services.
None
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult

for the cell to be selected.
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for
the cell to be selected.
If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell

during cell reselection.
If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this cell
during cell reselection.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power

consumption and radiation of the MS are high.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not
be able to access the channel.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage
area of the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may
not be able to access the system.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage
area of the cell is small. The usage of cell resources
decreases.
None
None
In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an

excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong
reselection occurs.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period

when cell reselection is prohibited increases.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when
cell reselection is prohibited decreases.
None
None
None
In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an

excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong
reselection occurs.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult

for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may
be wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an
MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access
the cell.
If this Therefore,
parameter is the system
set to may be value,
an excessive overloaded.
it is difficult
be wasted.
the
If cell.
this Therefore,
it is difficult
be wasted.
the cell.
If this Therefore,
it is difficult
be wasted.
MS to parameter
If this access the is
cell.
setHowever, too many
to an excessive MSsthe
value, mayMS access
sends
the
a cell.
new Therefore,
Channel the system
Request within amay
longbe overloaded.
interval after the
channel request fails, thus reducing access collisions but
slowing down the MS access speed.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a
new Channel Request within a short interval after the
If this parameter
channel is setthus
request fails, to an excessive value,
accelerating the MSthe MS needs
access
to waitbut
speed for adding
a long time
accessbefore sending the next request. This
collisions.
may affect MS services.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that
a response is sent, but the MS has not received it because
of transmission delay. In this case, the MS also resends the
access request.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some

information may be missing.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection
measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many
bandwidth resources.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some
information may be missing.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection
measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many
The MS should
bandwidth stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time
resources.
after the measurement report is sent.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may
stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be
affected.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS enters the
DRX mode and may send the measurement report
The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows:
frequently.
1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage,
Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value
range 0-20 dB is recommended.
2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended.
If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell,

this parameter should be set to a high value when the
coverage area of the micro cell is large.
None
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension

measurement report is sent frequently.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement
information is not obtained timely.
None
None
None
None
None

EGPRS MS is shortened.
None
None
None
None
When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing

the parameter value improves the transmission rate.
When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing
the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally
releasing TBFs.
PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually, PAN_INC

= 2 x PAN_DEC.
However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.
None
If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the
MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC
sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many
radio resources are not used but occupied.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of
the sliding window decreases and the probability of the
uplink TBF transmission countdown increases, thus
decreasing the performance of uplink transmission.
To make this value more accurate, you need to estimate the
delay in the transmission between the MS and the BSC6
first.
NoneThis value is set based on the transmission delay.
It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment
If this parameter
message
Some MSson doallnot issupport
PCHs set to AGCHs
and athe
higher invalue,
11-bit non-DRX
accesstheburst.
TBF resources
mode than in
(including
DRX mode.TFI
Therefore, and
During
8bit timeslots)
the periodare
is recommended. reserved mode,
of non-DRX for a longthe time.
TBF If
no downlink data
establishment time needs to be sent,
decreases, many
but the resources
power are not
consumption
used
of thebut MSoccupied
increases. for a long time.
If
In the
DRXtimer
mode, is set
theto MSa monitors
smaller value,
paging the MS releases
messages onlytheon
TBF resources
the home paging within
group,a shorter
and thenperiod. However,
receives if the
the Immediate
network
Assignment sends new downlink
message on all thePDU data packets,
paging blocks and theAGCH
network
must initiateblocks.
reservation a paging TheorTBFimmediate assignment
establishment procedure.
time increases,
Therefore,
but the power the consumption
downlink TBFof establishment
the MS decreases. takes a longer
period.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the TBF
If the downloadtime
establishment dataincreases
packets from
but the thepower
network are not
consumption of
If
thethe
received
MS timerand is T3192
decreases.set toIfadoes lower
this notvalue,
expire,
parameter the MSnetwork
isthe
set can
to andetect the
directly
excessive
TBF
sends
value, establishment
a Packet
the failureAssignment
Downlink
TBF establishment within
time a shorter period.
message
decreases but If the
to the TBF
establish
power
establishment
a new downlink
consumption offails,
TBF,MS
the the
thus average delaythe
shortening
increases. of TBF
packet access is
establishment
short,
time. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad
radio
On one environment
hand, the value decreases. In addition,
of the T3192 timerthe small timer
depends on the
value
average increases
transmissionthe probability of the retransmission
interval between two successive of the
packet
downlink access
data. request, thus increasing the probability of
reassignment
On the other hand, by the youPCU andto
need wasting system resources.
comprehensively analyze
If
thethe timermodels
traffic is set to of athe
higher value,
cell and takethetheMSservice
takes aload longer
of the
period
cell intotoconsideration.
detect the TBFWhen establishment failure. If are
network resources the TBF
establishment
sufficient, that
Currently, fails,
is thethe
the GPRS GPRSaverage
network is notdelay
congestion of packet
rate
configured is low, access
with the is
theT3192
Gs
long,
should but
interface the
beor set success
toPCCCH.
the a large rate of TBF
value, establishment
shortening
Therefore, Network the in bad
time
Operation radio
to Mode
environment
establish
II is selectednewby increases.
TBFs and improving data transmission rate.
default.

2G Huawei NSN Parameter Mapping PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2G Huawei NSN Parameter Mapping PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Parameters Table Recommended value

Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900&DCS1800

MCC Cell_Common 470

NCC Cell_Common 0~7

BCC Cell_Common 0~7

GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS

EDGE Support Cell_Common No

RAC Cell_Common As per plan

FH MODE Cell_Common As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Cell_Common 63

Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell

Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None

UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use

Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Cell_Common Yes

DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes

TRX Index TRx Depend on invidual site

TRX No. TRx Depend on invidual site

Cell Index TRx Depend on invidual site

Site Index TRx Depend on invidual site

Active State TRx Activated

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Basic_Parameter 63

Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes

Call Reestablishment Forbidden Basic_Parameter Yes

UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use

Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 3

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24

MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4

N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. HO 30

MS Power Prediction after HO HO No

PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No

Load HO Allowed HO Yes

CRH Idle_Mode 6dB

NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 255

ATT Idle_Mode Yes

T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000